(Fgarbage_collect): Dox fix. Return a list as
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
1fa28578
GM
43\f
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
7495f7ca
EZ
46+++
47** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
48as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
49with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
50example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
51middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
52
1636ca09 53+++
a01cfb77
GM
54** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
55changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
56buffer by default.
57
c607d53d 58** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 59trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
60this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
61
4104194e
GM
62** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
63be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
64
c6f01e00
MB
65** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
66To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
67`auto-compression-mode' command.
68
4c724b32
DL
69** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
70`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
71
b856f39c 72+++
068127d6
GM
73** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
74operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
75
fd06c7da
MB
76** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
77(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
78remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
79may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
80
8ac08dea 81+++
62c273d7
DL
82** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
83is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
84
85+++
86** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
87mode `iswitchb-mode'.
88
8ac08dea 89+++
f393cf90
DL
90** Gnus changes.
91
92The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
93four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
94internationalization and mail-fetching.
95
96*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
97many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
98
99If you used procmail like in
100
101(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
102(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
103(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
104(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
105
327652be 106this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
107
108(setq mail-sources
109 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
110 :suffix ".in")))
111
112More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
113Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
114
115*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
116Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
117Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
118probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 119
60dd7e0e 120*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
121parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
122are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
123now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
124
125*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
126called to position point.
127
128*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
129summary buffers and NOV files.
130
131*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
132of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
133
134*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
135subtly different manner.
136
137*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
138and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
139ever-changing layouts.
140
141*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
142
72190b84 143*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
144
145** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1468859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
147more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
148empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
149window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
150on.
151
ba9eeda1
GM
152** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
153set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
154file that is already visited under a different name.
155
42ac0ae5
GM
156** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
157nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
158
159** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
160recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
161signaled.
162
ba9eeda1 163** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
164support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
165use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
166buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
167M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
168new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
169
b941a14b 170+++
ba9eeda1 171** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 172and displays information about that.
b941a14b 173
ba9eeda1 174** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
175file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
176
d7b38c05 177** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 178added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
179Postscript files are included.
180
181** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
182`dired-ref.tex'.
183
25ad1371
GM
184** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
185expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
186
187This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
188determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
189mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
190interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
191regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
192associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
193
b856f39c 194+++
f0298744
DL
195** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
196displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
197menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
198menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
199
9a8d84ca
DL
200** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
201a version-dependent component.
202
d76c03ea
GM
203** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
204Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
205will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
206character is still bound as before.
207
3b4fa1b2
DL
208** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
209using that menu.
210
40e857ea 211** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 212suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 213
beb2eb00 214+++
c08398de
DL
215** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
216buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
217contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
218by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
219insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
220the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
221Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
222
db7a3ede 223+++
3d6cd763
GM
224** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
225coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
226escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
227such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
228recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 229always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 230read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
231(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
232RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 233
0b8a3a6d
DL
234** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
235environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
236
424d8b44 237+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
238** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
239point in a pop-up window.
240
6d35b49f 241+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
242** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
243displays all characters in that character set.
244
245** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
246coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
247
a4067978 248+++
5cb6a58e 249** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 250on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
251defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
252commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 253
424d8b44 254+++
a1b8d58b
GM
255** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
256
6e417ca5
DL
257** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
258been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
259
424d8b44 260+++
5898e075
DL
261** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
262`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
263indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
264indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
265
424d8b44 266+++
abfcc168
GM
267** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
268sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 269(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
270You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
271
424d8b44 272+++
cc181e95
GM
273** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
274on the display using several methods
275
424d8b44 276+++
cc181e95
GM
277- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
278a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
279be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
280
424d8b44 281+++
cc181e95 282- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 283equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 284
da4496b6 285- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
286
287- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
288the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
289
424d8b44 290+++
3b4fa1b2 291** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 292an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 293command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 294does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 295
424d8b44 296+++
176256a1 297** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
298`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
299typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 300
dd0add8e
DL
301** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
302characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
303
bf3ba9ac 304+++
699238d9
GM
305** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
306compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
307this behavior.
308
309The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
310compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
311Emacs dump core.
312
424d8b44 313+++
699238d9 314** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 315
7233c5bd
GM
316*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
317whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
318is useful for debugging X problems.
319
320Example:
321
699238d9 322 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 323
100b3cbb
GM
324*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
325visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
326the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
327and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
328visual class names are
329
330 TrueColor
331 PseudoColor
332 DirectColor
333 StaticColor
334 GrayScale
335 StaticGray
336
337Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
338`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
339meaning.
340
341The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
342supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
343`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
344visual.
345
346Example:
347
699238d9 348 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
349
350*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
351specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
352default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
353resource values are `true' or `on'.
354
355Example:
356
699238d9 357 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 358
0d0c76b8
EZ
359** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
360more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
361now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
362
42088c12 363** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 364display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
365shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
366be customized.
c60ea02e 367
424d8b44 368+++
31047e0d
DL
369** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
370
424d8b44 371+++
b02786f9
GM
372** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
373all frames except the selected one.
374
3261c1d8
DL
375** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
376to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
377
ffe36136 378** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
379the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
380MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
381displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
382
0292b49f 383+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
384** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
385MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 386
559cee90
DL
387** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
388read mail from the menu etc.
389
480b5773 390+++
271b4185
GM
391** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
392a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
393
0daee095
GM
394** Changes in Texinfo mode.
395
a5e350c9 396*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
397macros
398
399 Key binding Macro
400 -------------------------
401 C-c C-c C-s @strong
402 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 403 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 404 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 405 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
406 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
407 M-RET @item
408
409*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 410
559cee90
DL
411** Changes in Outline mode.
412
413There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
414`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
415the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
416
327652be 417** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 418
c0a8c108
EZ
419+++
420*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
421with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
422are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
423Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
424buffers to kill, as before.
425
426Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 427i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
428this way.
429
956777b3
GM
430** Changes to Show Paren mode.
431
432*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
433The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
434use. Default is 1000.
435
f6989277 436+++
404fa7d6
DL
437** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
438groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
439
424d8b44
DL
440+++
441** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
442M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
443M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
444buffers.
8964fec7 445
424d8b44 446+++
39783d73
WP
447** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
448under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
449.emacs file.
450
451The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
452determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
453
d35fce81
GM
454** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
455abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
456`directory-abbrev-alist'.
457
a933dad1
DL
458** Faces and frame parameters.
459
460There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
461Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
462`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
463`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
464sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
465for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
466parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
467
468Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
469`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 470`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
471`default' face and vice versa.
472
d80061fa 473+++
f77a4a8a
GM
474** New face `menu'.
475
476The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
477Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
478attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
479
424d8b44 480+++
a933dad1
DL
481** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
482
483The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
484colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
485correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
486the screen gamma of a frame's display.
487
488PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
489in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
490color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
491
492The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
493`ScreenGamma'.
494
495** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
496
497The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
498Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
499oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
500of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
501the text.
502
503** Emacs has a new face implementation.
504
505The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
506font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
507height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
508These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
509specify a font.
510
511Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
512These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
513under Lisp changes, below.
514
515** New default font is Courier 12pt.
516
424d8b44
DL
517+++
518** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
519of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
520otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
521
522** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
523truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
524foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
525customizing face `fringe'.
526
8d0f00fd
MB
527** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
528You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
529
530The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
531versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
532and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
533
534** LessTif support.
535
424d8b44
DL
536Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
537You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
538
539** Toolkit scroll bars.
540
541Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
542LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
543configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
544bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
545bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
546Emacs.
547
548When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
549Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
550Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
551Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
552define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
553`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
554
555Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
556a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
557directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
558different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
559system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
560add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
561
562The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
563`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
564This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
565image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
566Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
567
568** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
569
570When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
571widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
572Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
573
424d8b44 574+++
a933dad1
DL
575** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
576
577When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
578whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
579defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
580highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
581displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
582whitespace.
583
6e612d4d 584+++
a933dad1
DL
585** Busy-cursor.
586
587Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
588display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
589
424d8b44 590+++
a933dad1
DL
591** Blinking cursor
592
593M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
594terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
595and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
596the group `cursor'.
597
8ac08dea 598+++
a933dad1
DL
599** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
600
601This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
602generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
603See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
604details.
605
606Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
607have to do anything to activate it.
608
609** Tabs and variable-width text.
610
611Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
612defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
613independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
614Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
615
616** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
617
424d8b44 618+++
a933dad1
DL
619*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
620
621 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
622
79dd1637
RS
623The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
624LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 625
79dd1637
RS
626*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
627LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 628
34d90e29 629+++
a933dad1
DL
630** Hscrolling in C code.
631
cc181e95
GM
632Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
633`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
634customized.
a933dad1 635
8ac08dea 636+++
a933dad1
DL
637** Tool bar support.
638
639Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
640of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
641changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
642displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
643if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
644icons will be used.
645
646To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
647for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
648also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 649
424d8b44 650+++
a933dad1
DL
651** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
652
653Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
654mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
655line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
656about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
657in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
658
659Currently, the following actions have been defined:
660
661- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
662buffers.
663
664- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
665M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
666
667- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
668
424d8b44
DL
669- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
670`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
671
672- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
673
674** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
675
676When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 677from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
678non-nil.
679
680** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
681
682Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
683Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
684the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
685italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
686Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
687attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
688on terminals.
a933dad1 689
54a9404d
EZ
690The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
691supported on character terminals.
692
a933dad1
DL
693** Sound support
694
2f516940 695Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 696driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 697supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 698
424d8b44 699+++
a933dad1
DL
700** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
701the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
702forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
703value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
704users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
705even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
706
707The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
708
0e18b431 709+++
a933dad1
DL
710** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
711
712As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
713drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
714`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
715
fdd8bb68 716+++
a933dad1
DL
717** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
718bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
719
720This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
721`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
722variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
723
c5d00c64 724+++
a933dad1
DL
725** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
726
727When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 728value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 729number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 730fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
731
732When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
733value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
734number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 735fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
736
737** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
738notably at the end of lines.
739
740All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
741spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
742
424d8b44 743+++
eee54b0e
DL
744There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
745
a933dad1
DL
746** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
747query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
748after each match to get the replacement text.
749
00782214 750+++
d5483ab1
GM
751** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
752you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 753
424d8b44 754** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
755you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
756lisp-complete-symbol.
757
7af69644 758+++
a933dad1
DL
759** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
760
163ea954 761If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
762longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
763is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
764minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
765
766- User option: max-mini-window-height
767
768Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
769fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 770specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
771
772Default is 0.25.
773
a299a6f0
GM
774- User option: resize-mini-windows
775
776How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 777resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
778grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
779again.
780
781Default is `grow-only'.
782
2f72fd2f
GM
783** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
784
0d43b60d
GM
785** Changes to hideshow.el
786
787Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
788selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
789conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
790
791*** Generalized block selection and traversal
792
793A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
794(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
795which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
796`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
797point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
798(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
799
800If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
801i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
802backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
803the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
804
805*** Isearch support for updating mode line
806
807During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
808blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
809line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
810portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
811is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
812
813To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
814something like this in your .emacs.
815
816 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
817 (lambda ()
818 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
819
327652be
TTN
820*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
821
822Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
823header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
824`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
825moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
826block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
827behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
828useful.
829
830You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
831function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
832of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
833code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
834appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
835
836(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
837 (hs-hide-level 1)
838 (forward-sexp 1))
839(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
840
841The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
842emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
843only for code blocks.
844
845*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
846
847Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
848parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
849display for implementation.
850
851*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
852
853The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
854LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
855which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
856new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
857
858 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
859 hs-show-block C-c C-s
860 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
861 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
862 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
863 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
864 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
865
866These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
867
559cee90
DL
868** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
869
424d8b44 870+++
1b24b888
GM
871*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
872an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
873log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
874
424d8b44 875+++
1b24b888
GM
876**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
877current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
878
879+++
1b24b888
GM
880*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
881in a log file.
eb2aac9d 882
502004be 883+++
1b24b888
GM
884*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
885entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 886
502004be 887+++
1b24b888 888*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
889version number is performed based on regular expressions from
890`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
891Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 892
2c63c979 893*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 894
79c78e77
GM
895** Changes to cmuscheme
896
897*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
898`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
899
3476b54a
GM
900** Changes in Font Lock
901
902*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 903font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 904
2c63c979
SM
905*** multiline patterns are now supported.
906
a5e350c9
SM
907*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
908the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 909
601e0081
SM
910*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
911Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
912
b3b98592
GM
913** Comint (subshell) changes
914
988cded7
MB
915These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
916include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
917
918*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
919to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
920parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
921user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
922this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
923respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
924feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
925`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
926
927*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
928and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
929
988cded7 930*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
931buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
932buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
933
934The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
935M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
936the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
937
988cded7
MB
938*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
939and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
940see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 941
988cded7 942*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
943saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
944argument, it appends to the file.
945
988cded7 946*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
947(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
948compatibility.
949
0e40b809
EL
950*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
951ring (history).
d648cc45 952
e26cec67
GM
953** Changes to Rmail mode
954
b97cd2cc 955*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
956set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
957receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
958recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
959`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
960as correspondent.
961
962Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
963mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 964regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 965
3b55acc9
GM
966*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
967to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
968Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
969with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
970for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
971
6a1950ec
GM
972*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
973like `j'.
974
5bb6f079
RS
975*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
976specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 977digest message.
e26cec67 978
993d8b7d
DL
979*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
980in which folder to put messages automatically.
981
400a1ed0
GM
982** Changes to TeX mode
983
a5e350c9 984*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
985`latex-mode'.
986
a5e350c9
SM
987*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
988
989*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
990
991*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 992
a933dad1
DL
993** Changes to RefTeX mode
994
995*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
996 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
997 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
998 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
999 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1000 can be edited from that buffer.
1001
1002*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1003 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1004 `A' to use all marked entries).
1005
1006*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1007 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1008
1009*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1010 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1011 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1012 been cited.
1013
38de9631
GM
1014** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1015The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1016semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1017in column 1 are always made leaves.
1018
a933dad1
DL
1019** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1020has the following new features:
1021
1022*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1023may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1024to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1025time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1026
1027*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1028feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1029file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1030compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1031pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1032defaults to 1.
1033
5d94f558 1034** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1035file names.
1036
424d8b44 1037+++
a933dad1
DL
1038** Tooltips.
1039
1040Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1041mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1042turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1043
1044Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1045variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1046the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1047tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1048
424d8b44 1049+++
a933dad1
DL
1050** Customize changes
1051
1052*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1053`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1054cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1055
1056*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1057Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1058default).
1059
0ae51efb
GM
1060*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1061between custom options. Example:
1062
1063 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1064 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1065 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1066 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1067 :group 'mule
1068 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1069 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1070
1071This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1072current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1073first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1074
a933dad1
DL
1075** New features in evaluation commands
1076
5e03eb84 1077*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1078modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1079print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1080customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1081eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1082
5e03eb84
GM
1083*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1084code when called with a prefix argument.
1085
ead53494
GM
1086** Ispell changes
1087
37d8a691 1088+++
bbe15990
EZ
1089*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1090transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1091spell-checks the current buffer.
1092
37d8a691 1093+++
385ff9e3
GM
1094*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1095added.
1096
1097*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1098correction is made and re-checked.
1099
74ec6045 1100*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1101
1102*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1103cases.
1104
1105*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1106on syntax errors.
1107
1108*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1109end of the buffer.
1110
a933dad1
DL
1111** Dired changes
1112
1113*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1114command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1115is, delete only empty directories.
1116
1117*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1118command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1119copy directories recursively.
1120
f6737cde
GM
1121*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1122in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1123the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1124
2f72fd2f
GM
1125*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1126replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1127directory.
1128
7381ae05
MB
1129*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1130a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1131This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1132will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1133accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1134
e024b101
GM
1135*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1136from ls switches.
1137
60b392a7
MB
1138*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1139of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1140which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1141source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1142
a933dad1
DL
1143** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1144use the -f option when sending mail.
1145
b1c609b1
GM
1146** CC mode changes.
1147
1148Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1149current user setups (although it's believed that these
1150incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1151However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1152back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1153compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1154release.
1155
7972fcfc
GM
1156*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1157This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1158of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1159non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1160want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1161have to bother.
1162
1163Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1164situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1165and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1166If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1167the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1168by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1169
b1c609b1
GM
1170*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1171When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1172variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1173take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1174is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1175settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1176possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1177Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1178
1179By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1180special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1181the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1182of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1183above.
1184
1185Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1186when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1187function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1188call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1189then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1190values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1191only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1192function documentation for more info.
1193
1194The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1195especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1196with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1197intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1198such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1199is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1200configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1201global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1202
1203(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1204
1205**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1206This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1207
1208This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1209variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1210completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1211the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1212empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1213style system.
1214
1215**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1216In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1217c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1218as far as possible.
1219
1220*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1221CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1222surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1223chapter about this in the manual.
1224
1225**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1226The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1227recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1228primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1229adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1230
1231**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1232This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1233c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1234
1235**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1236This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1237
1238It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1239Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1240A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1241inside CC Mode.
1242
1243Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1244causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1245the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1246available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1247cc-mode/).
1248
1249**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1250The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1251specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1252literals.
1253
1254**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1255It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1256prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1257you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1258this function.
1259
1260*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1261It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1262to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1263struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1264Thanks to Eric Eide.
1265
1266*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1267It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1268opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1269
1270**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1271
1272*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1273See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1274better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1275and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1276
1277*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1278previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1279the column specified by comment-column.
1280
1281*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1282In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1283is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1284prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1285contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1286don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1287
1288*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1289instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1290arguments.
1291
1292*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1293
1294*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1295c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1296c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1297variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1298Provan).
1299
1300*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1301
c407c570
GM
1302** Makefile mode changes
1303
1304*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1305
5d94f558 1306*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1307Fontlock mode is active.
1308
87be76f6
GM
1309** Isearch changes
1310
3353ef5a
GM
1311*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1312so that searches can be resumed.
1313
1314*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1315respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1316that started the search.
1317
87be76f6 1318*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1319selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1320
c8a8458a 1321+++
87be76f6
GM
1322*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1323
d35fce81 1324Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1325`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1326search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1327before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1328highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1329`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1330
1331The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1332will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1333Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1334using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1335usual snappy response.
1336
1337If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1338matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1339set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1340isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1341
21bc6203 1342+++
35384f06
GM
1343** Changes in sort.el
1344
1345The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1346as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1347new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1348numeric base.
87be76f6 1349
d7b511c4
GM
1350** Changes to Ange-ftp
1351
424d8b44 1352+++
d7b511c4 1353*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1354names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1355sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1356
d7b511c4
GM
1357*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1358ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1359
9d453139
SS
1360*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1361output ^M at the end of lines.
1362
4b9347b3
GM
1363** Shell script mode changes.
1364
1365Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1366derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1367sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1368
79214ddf
FP
1369** Etags changes.
1370
1371*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1372
aca0be23 1373*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1374possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1375{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1376This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1377a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1378
79214ddf
FP
1379*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1380declarations when given the --declarations option.
1381
1382*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1383"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1384
1385*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1386types.
1387
de370c4c 1388*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1389
1390*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1391
1392*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1393are now tagged.
1394
1395*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1396variables are tagged.
1397
1398*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1399
8dc78b52
FP
1400*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1401for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1402
c8d94f86 1403+++
f6737cde
GM
1404** Changes in etags.el
1405
3f6e4b8b
GM
1406*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1407tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1408is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1409
f6737cde
GM
1410*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1411the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1412
1413If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1414FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1415TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1416obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1417
1418TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1419
1420FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1421List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1422
1423A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1424
1425 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1426 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1427 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1428
1429*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1430of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1431
1432*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1433names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1434
0c68ce6f
GM
1435*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1436If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1437/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1438"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1439point will go to the beginning of the file.
1440
424d8b44 1441+++
fbc164de
PE
1442** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1443and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1444LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1445
c3eb1f10 1446+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1447** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1448Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14498859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1450GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14518859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1452releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1453(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1454
424d8b44 1455+++
163ea954 1456** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1457remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1458appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1459
1460** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1461
424d8b44 1462+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1463** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1464
6ab8d72d 1465+++
f6499c03 1466** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1467containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1468expression from that list, are not checked.
1469
5d94f558
SS
1470** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1471When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1472and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1473the buffer, just like for the local files.
1474
dc28878c
GM
1475** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1476
df8a9f78 1477+++
95931eb1
GM
1478** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1479displays local abbrevs, only.
1480
54baed30
GM
1481** VC Changes
1482
1483VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1484easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1485Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1486to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1487changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1488`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1489version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1490each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1491file is registered in that backend.
1492
1493When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1494backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1495directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1496master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1497the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1498As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1499
1500The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1501still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1502RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1503vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1504where it doesn't make sense.)
1505
1506The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1507obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1508`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1509
1510*** General Changes
1511
1512The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1513checks are always done now.
1514
327652be 1515VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1516operations.
1517
c286608e
SM
1518`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1519`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1520`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1521
22933be8
AS
1522The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1523first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1524current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1525the working file (``merge news'').
1526
1527The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1528(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1529downwards.
1530
1531*** Multiple Backends
1532
1533VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1534useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1535repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1536commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1537local RCS archives.
1538
1539To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1540should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1541backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1542`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1543
1544If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1545it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1546Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1547by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1548backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1549VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1550happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1551from the more remote backend.
1552
1553If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1554another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1555any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1556pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1557
1558After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1559changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1560local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1561buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1562
54baed30
GM
1563*** Changes for CVS
1564
1565There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1566default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1567remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1568by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1569regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1570that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1571queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1572
22933be8
AS
1573If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1574repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1575revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1576any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1577backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1578number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1579(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1580of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1581the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1582automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1583since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1584name.)
22933be8 1585
54baed30
GM
1586If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1587repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1588If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1589commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1590current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1591entire directory tree.
1592
1593The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1594"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1595is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1596"watched" by other developers.)
1597
22933be8
AS
1598The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1599(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1600an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1601starting at the given directory.
1602
54baed30
GM
1603*** Lisp Changes in VC
1604
1605VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1606add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1607library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1608then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1609a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1610provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1611of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1612you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1613`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1614
a933dad1
DL
1615** New modes and packages
1616
b95b34e5
GM
1617*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1618rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1619shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1620
1621Features are:
1622
1623- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1624 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1625 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1626 | / \
1627
1628- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1629 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1630 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1631 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1632 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1633 you are drawing.
1634
1635- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1636 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1637
1638- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1639 flood-filling.
1640
1641- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1642 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1643 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1644 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1645
b95b34e5
GM
1646- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1647 also do without the mouse.
1648
1649- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1650 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1651 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1652 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1653 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1654
1655- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1656
1657 lines straight-lines
1658 rectangles squares
1659 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1660 ellipses circles
1661 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1662 spray-can setting size for spraying
1663 vaporize line vaporize lines
1664 erase characters erase rectangles
1665
1666 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1667 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1668 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1669 drawing.
1670
1671 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1672 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1673 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1674 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1675
1676- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1677 can be turned off).
1678
4473cdd9
JW
1679+++
1680*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1681implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1682It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1683functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1684history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1685will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1686the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1687rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1688all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1689
ff332647 1690+++
90cbf47e
GM
1691*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1692intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1693typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1694on certain projects.
1695
894ca69e 1696+++
90cbf47e 1697*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1698regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1699
d96d6bb0 1700 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1701
1702will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1703face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1704typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1705Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1706appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1707current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1708corresponding file is read.
1709
424d8b44 1710+++
d96d6bb0 1711*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1712Emacs is idle.
1713
31fc5d15
GM
1714*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1715parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1716
5cb6a58e
SM
1717*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1718package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1719be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1720`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1721comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1722
424d8b44 1723+++
578979ee
GM
1724*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1725facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1726separate Texinfo file.
1727
424d8b44
DL
1728+++
1729*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1730by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1731provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1732`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1733enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1734
424d8b44 1735+++
6abca616
EZ
1736*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1737without invoking external programs.
1738
1739The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1740and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1741`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1742is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1743Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1744
1745The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1746page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1747
719e2c6e 1748+++
5e5dff44
GM
1749*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1750authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1751
1752The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1753the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1754the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1755Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1756even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1757single step.
1758
1759On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1760matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1761probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1762contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1763
424d8b44 1764+++
f7136ee8
GM
1765*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1766unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1767actually modifying content of a buffer.
1768
bbd9b566
GM
1769*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1770PostScript.
1771
1772Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1773
1774The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1775
1776 ; comment (until end of line)
1777 A non-terminal
1778 "C" terminal
1779 ?C? special
1780 $A default non-terminal
1781 $"C" default terminal
1782 $?C? default special
1783 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1784 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1785 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1786 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1787 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1788 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1789 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1790 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1791 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1792 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1793 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1794 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1795 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1796 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1797 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1798
1799Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1800
99453a38
GM
1801*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1802align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1803determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1804example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1805equal signs of assignments.
1806
424d8b44 1807+++
559cee90
DL
1808*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1809paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1810
424d8b44 1811+++
6448a6b3
GM
1812*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1813list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1814buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1815customize the package.
1816
6344985d
GM
1817*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1818
249652b1
GM
1819*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1820replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1821is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1822and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1823not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1824which answers different needs.
1825
424d8b44 1826+++
3476b54a
GM
1827*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1828suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1829expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1830course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1831reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1832to be enabled.
1833
424d8b44 1834+++
8964fec7
SM
1835*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1836containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1837
424d8b44 1838+++
a933dad1
DL
1839*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1840
424d8b44 1841+++
a933dad1
DL
1842*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1843
1844*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1845
8901d1ac
GM
1846Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1847`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1848disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1849`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1850displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1851and background colors.
1852
a933dad1
DL
1853*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1854Pascal) language.
1855
f6499c03 1856+++
a933dad1
DL
1857*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1858the text at point.
1859
1860*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1861
424d8b44 1862+++
8d54eb69
DL
1863*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1864
a933dad1
DL
1865*** whitespace.el ???
1866
ebcfda83
GM
1867*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1868files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1869(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1870interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1871often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1872uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1873codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1874
1875*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1876
1877Here is an example of columns:
1878
1879horse apple bus
1880dog pineapple car EXTRA
1881porcupine strawberry airplane
1882
1883Doing the following settings:
1884
1885 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1886 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1887 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1888 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1889
1890
1891Selecting the lines above and typing:
1892
1893 M-x delimit-columns-region
1894
1895It results:
1896
1897[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1898[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1899[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1900
1901delim-col has the following options:
1902
1903 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1904 before all columns.
1905
1906 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1907 between each column.
1908
1909 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1910 after all columns.
1911
1912 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1913 each column.
1914
1915delim-col has the following commands:
1916
1917 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1918 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1919
424d8b44 1920+++
f507826c 1921*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1922were operated on recently.
1923
1924M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1925
31fc5d15
GM
1926M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1927recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1928
31fc5d15
GM
1929M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1930filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1931file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1932
31fc5d15
GM
1933- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1934- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1935- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1936
31fc5d15
GM
1937The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1938dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1939
8062f458
DL
1940*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1941text.
1942
424d8b44 1943+++
36e24b82 1944*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1945of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1946specific to Message mode.
1947
424d8b44 1948+++
36e24b82
DL
1949*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1950viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1951with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1952
424d8b44 1953+++
aaa659ef
DL
1954*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1955interface to access directory servers using different directory
1956protocols. It has a separate manual.
1957
eee54b0e
DL
1958*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1959for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1960
424d8b44 1961+++
612839b6
GM
1962*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1963
5d94f558 1964*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1965minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1966
399da7e3
DL
1967*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1968with the diary features.
1969
6e417ca5
DL
1970*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1971numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1972
4a27bdfb
GM
1973*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1974Fill mode.
1975
60dd7e0e
DL
1976*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1977Gnus facilities.
1978
dace60cf
JW
1979*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1980facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1981difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1982they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1983
965bc065
DL
1984+++
1985** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1986paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1987
1988+++
1989** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1990to be visited as images.
1991
a933dad1
DL
1992** Withdrawn packages
1993
1994*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1995functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1996
3261c1d8
DL
1997*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1998
1999*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
2000
2001\f
01242779
DL
2002* Incompatible Lisp changes
2003
2004There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2005may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2006
2007** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2008`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2009
2010** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2011which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2012may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2013these properties are active.
2014
4dd4cc14 2015** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2016ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2017
2018** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2019buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2020make a difference to some code.
2021
4dd4cc14
DL
2022** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2023operates on the minibuffer.
2024
7c94ccf6
EZ
2025** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2026cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2027different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2028(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2029Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2030character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2031multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2032encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2033reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2034sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2035a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2036the buffer as multibyte characters.
2037
2038Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2039MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2040appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2041
01242779 2042\f
ce75fd23
GM
2043* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2044(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2045
52d89894
GM
2046+++
2047** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2048alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2049
693c4692 2050** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2051
1c14ba45 2052+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2053** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2054deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2055being deleted.
2056
1c14ba45 2057+++
39e776cd
SM
2058** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2059
a18a342d 2060+++
1396138a 2061** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2062If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2063skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2064with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2065C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2066charset.
2067
4fbdfdcf
MB
2068+++
2069** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2070the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2071message.
2072
6a0b0752
MB
2073** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2074expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2075
1c14ba45 2076+++
47e351a3
GM
2077** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2078with the more general `:mask' property.
2079
1c14ba45 2080+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2081** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2082
a2bd77b8
GM
2083** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2084backslash.
2085
424d8b44
DL
2086+++
2087** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2088is running in batch mode. For example,
2089
2090 (message "%s" (read t))
2091
2092will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2093to standard output.
2094
2095+++
2096** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2097`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2098
ead53494
GM
2099** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2100will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2101frame or window.
2102
f6499c03 2103+++
27848c01
GM
2104** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2105were added
2106
2107- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2108
2109Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2110a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2111
2112- Function: remq ELT LIST
2113
2114Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2115comparison is done with `eq'.
2116
1c14ba45 2117+++
27848c01 2118** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2119
b548072f
GM
2120** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2121has been changed.
2122
424d8b44 2123+++
07b14857
KH
2124** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2125without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2126convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2127
1c14ba45 2128+++
9662da0b
GM
2129** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2130or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2131
7fce7efb
DL
2132** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2133function was declared obsolete.
2134
1c14ba45 2135+++
5d94f558 2136** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2137retained as an alias).
2138
f98d3086
SM
2139** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2140It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2141is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2142
87efd256
GM
2143** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2144
39b39373
GM
2145- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2146
2147Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2148omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2149the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2150even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2151minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2152means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2153
67c9a1d2
GM
2154** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2155
2156- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2157
2158Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2159
2160This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2161calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2162argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2163value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2164returned.
2165
2166Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2167if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2168it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2169minibuffer even if it is active.
2170
2171Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2172counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2173too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2174and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2175`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2176entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2177
2178ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2179ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2180ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2181ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2182ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2183If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2184Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2185
ead53494
GM
2186** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2187event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2188argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2189
25fa6deb
GM
2190** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2191call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2192message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2193Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2194
5d94f558 2195** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2196meaning no limit.
2197
5d94f558 2198** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2199coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2200DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2201
9b2999d0
DL
2202+++
2203** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2204list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2205
c286608e
SM
2206** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2207
9b2999d0 2208+++
80c05bd3
DL
2209** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2210buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2211This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2212than replacing the local map.
2213
4bc7a543
DL
2214** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2215after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2216
2217** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2218
f6499c03 2219+++
c286608e
SM
2220** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2221as promised long ago.
f0298744 2222
5d94f558 2223** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2224\f
2225* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2226
2227Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2228--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2229When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2230so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2231
85c75536
MB
2232*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2233buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2234the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2235restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2236
0b8a3a6d
DL
2237*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2238`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2239when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2240multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2241
2242*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2243`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2244contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2245
2246*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2247changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2248[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2249regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2250the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2251extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2252bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2253eight-bit-graphic.
2254
2255** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2256
2257A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2258a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2259character set as previously.
2260
2261*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2262They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2263modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2264
2265CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2266characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2267range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2268case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2269
2270FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2271name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2272
2273*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2274registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2275"fontset-default".
2276
2277*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2278argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2279
2280** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2281composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2282buffers and strings.
2283
2284*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2285character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2286code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2287have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2288composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2289composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2290The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2291also been deleted.
2292
2293*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2294specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2295`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2296
2297*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2298MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2299composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2300may differ between buffer and string text.
2301
2302*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2303COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2304
2305*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2306directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2307Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2308`composition' from STRING.
2309
2310*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2311a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2312
2313*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2314obsolete.
2315
965bc065 2316** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2317`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2318for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2319U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2320
2321** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2322`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2323X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2324
2325+++
2326** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2327are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23280xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2329
399da7e3 2330+++
f0124b4a
DL
2331** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2332that offset in the file before writing.
2333
f98d3086
SM
2334** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2335compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2336
612839b6
GM
2337** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2338`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2339from which the command was issued.
2340
2341** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2342`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2343`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2344additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2345operate on.
2346
271b4185
GM
2347** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2348to `window-buffer-height'.
2349
2350- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2351
2352Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2353The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2354lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2355
2356Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2357respectively.
2358
2359If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2360COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2361
2362The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2363obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2364on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2365
2366Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2367buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2368possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2369is currently displayed in some window.
2370
3c30cb6e
DL
2371** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2372argument function's results.
2373
62f20204
GM
2374** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2375signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2376
c0510d27 2377** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2378header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2379
2380** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2381ignores differences in case and text representation.
2382
2383** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2384cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2385as follows:
2386
2387 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2388 nil don't display a cursor
2389 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2390 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2391 others display a box cursor.
2392
9a0dd3dc
GM
2393** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2394an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2395defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2396set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2397
d7b511c4 2398** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2399specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2400the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2401text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2402
2403Example:
2404
2405 (string-to-syntax "()")
2406 => (4 . 41)
2407
1fa28578
GM
2408** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2409other than 10.
2410
2411*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2412INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2413
5d94f558 2414 #b1111
1fa28578 2415 => 15
5d94f558 2416 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2417 => -15
2418
2419*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2420
5d94f558 2421 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2422 => 438
2423
2424*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2425
5d94f558 2426 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2427 => 48815
2428
2429*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2430
5d94f558 2431 #2R-111
1fa28578 2432 => -7
5d94f558 2433 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2434 => 267
2435
3d4ff2dd 2436** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2437the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2438and isn't a string.
2439
3d4ff2dd
GM
2440** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2441a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2442value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2443not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2444
16ce590d
DL
2445+++
2446** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2447
73825616 2448** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2449for a regexp in a string.
2450
2451** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2452`mouse-position-function'.
2453
723e779c
GM
2454** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2455that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2456
d1e103b2
GM
2457** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2458Keywords are now always considered constants.
2459
31047e0d
DL
2460+++
2461** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2462returns it.
2463
7a85e4df
GM
2464** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2465returned by function `recent-keys'.
2466
02b14400
RS
2467+++
2468** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2469can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2470Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2471etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2472mode.
404fa7d6 2473
02b14400 2474+++
8964fec7
SM
2475** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2476and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2477
02b14400
RS
2478+++
2479** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2480has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2481function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2482returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2483been performed."
2484
2485When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2486and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2487hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2488then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2489
02b14400 2490+++
81da8b32
GM
2491** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2492In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2493and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2494
02b14400 2495+++
9e207b90
GM
2496** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2497with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2498specified table.
2499
2500 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2501
2502Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2503TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2504saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2505what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2506
02b14400 2507+++
d7f89643 2508** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2509Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2510Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2511corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2512Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2513
02b14400 2514+++
dde9e75a
GM
2515** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2516removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2517
02b14400 2518+++
9da30515
GM
2519** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2520instead of being optional.
2521
02b14400 2522+++
d20679eb
GM
2523** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2524modify read-only text.
2525
02b14400 2526+++
fbc164de
PE
2527** New functions and variables for locales.
2528
2529The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2530decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2531time functions like strftime. The new variables
2532`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2533locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2534
2535The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2536environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2537the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2538environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2539not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2540`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2541`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2542
02b14400 2543+++
863476d1
SM
2544** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2545To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2546modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2547start sequences.
2548
02b14400 2549+++
ef6d912c
GM
2550** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2551because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2552
02b14400 2553+++
a933dad1
DL
2554** New function `propertize'
2555
2556The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2557strings with text properties.
2558
2559- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2560
2561Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2562by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2563PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2564specified value of that property. Example:
2565
2566 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2567
2568+++
2569** push and pop macros.
2570
02b14400
RS
2571Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2572are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2573as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2574
2575(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2576(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2577 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2578
02b14400
RS
2579** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2580
6c7fd5aa
RS
2581Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2582are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2583
2584(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2585 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2586 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2587 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2588
2589(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2590 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2591 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2592 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2593
a933dad1 2594+++
6c083b4c
GM
2595** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2596[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2597class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2598or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2599
2600[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2601[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2602[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2603[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2604[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2605 space, and DEL.
2606[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2607 and DEL.
2608[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2609 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2610 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2611[:alpha:] matches letters.
2612 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2613 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2614[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2615[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2616[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2617[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2618 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2619 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2620[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2621[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2622[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2623
2624+++
2625** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2626
2627The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2628
2629- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2630
2631The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2632are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2633
2634:test TEST
2635
2636TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2637Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2638it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2639
2640:size SIZE
2641
2642SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2643many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2644
2645:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2646
2647REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2648full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2649size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
26501.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2651old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2652
2653:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2654
2655THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2656hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2657(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2658
2659:weakness WEAK
2660
b548072f
GM
2661WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2662`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2663`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2664collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2665outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2666
2667- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2668
2669Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2670
2671- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2672
2673Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2674
2675- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2676
2677Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2678values are shared.
2679
2680- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2681
2682Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2683
2684- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2685
2686Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2687
2688- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2689
2690Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2691
2692- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2693
2694Returns the size of TABLE.
2695
d96d6bb0 2696- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2697
2698Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2699
2700- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2701
2702Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2703
2704- Function: clrhash TABLE
2705
2706Clear TABLE.
2707
2708- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2709
2710Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2711not found.
2712
79214ddf 2713- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2714
2715Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2716another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2717
2718- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2719
2720Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2721
2722- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2723
2724Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2725arguments KEY and VALUE.
2726
2727- Function: sxhash OBJ
2728
2729Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2730
2731- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2732
2733Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2734a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2735comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2736and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2737of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2738
2739TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2740
2741HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2742code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2743integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2744
2745Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2746be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2747
2748 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2749 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2750
2751 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2752 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2753
79214ddf 2754 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2755 'case-fold-string-hash))
2756
2757 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2758
2759+++
2760** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2761
2762It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2763circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2764a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2765
2766+++
2767** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2768
2769If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2770#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2771
a933dad1
DL
2772+++
2773** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2774t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2775specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2776is too short to reach that column.
2777
2778+++
2779** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2780now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2781after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2782two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2783
2784If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2785perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2786and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2787
2788+++
2789** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2790to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2791
2792+++
2793** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2794calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2795
2796+++
2797** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2798directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2799small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2800small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2801temporary-file-directory instead.
2802
2803+++
2804** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2805the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2806`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2807hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2808
2809+++
2810** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2811elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2812
2813+++
2814** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2815
2816make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2817creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2818ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2819
2820+++
2821** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2822
2823The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2824on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2825is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2826never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2827ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2828overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2829
2830If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2831that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2832to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2833The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2834
2835+++
2836** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2837
2838Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2839If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2840ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2841result string.
2842
2843Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2844string where arguments appear in the result string.
2845
2846Example:
2847
2848 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2849 (s2 "world"))
2850 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2851 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2852 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2853
2854results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2855
2856+++
2857** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2858
2859Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2860The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2861argument in it.
2862
2863 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2864 (arg "world"))
2865 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2866 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2867 (message msg arg))
2868
2869+++
2870** Sound support
2871
2872Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2873(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2874
2875Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2876(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2877to enable sound support.
2878
2879Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2880list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2881when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2882functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2883sound to play, before playing the sound.
2884
2885The following sound properties are supported:
2886
2887- `:file FILE'
2888
2889FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2890searched relative to `data-directory'.
2891
6fb40beb
GM
2892- `:data DATA'
2893
2894DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2895may be present, but not both.
2896
a933dad1
DL
2897- `:volume VOLUME'
2898
2899VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
29000..1. This property is optional.
2901
01242779
DL
2902- `:device DEVICE'
2903
2904DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2905sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2906
a933dad1
DL
2907Other properties are ignored.
2908
01242779
DL
2909An alternative interface is called as
2910(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2911
a933dad1 2912** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2913
9b2999d0 2914+++
356673d4
DL
2915** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2916a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2917
2918** Changes to garbage collection
2919
2920*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2921of live and free strings.
2922
2923*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2924strings that have been consed so far.
2925
a933dad1 2926\f
04545643
GM
2927* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2928Lisp Manual
2929
f7eb32aa 2930+++
a299a6f0
GM
2931** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2932mini-windows.
2933
9b2999d0 2934+++
a299a6f0 2935** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2936If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2937considered visible.
2938
a299a6f0 2939** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2940
9a8d84ca
DL
2941+++
2942** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2943
9b2999d0 2944+++
2c69ced2
GM
2945** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2946image.
2947
2948- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2949
2950Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2951
2952SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2953measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2954character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2955font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2956FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2957
9b2999d0 2958+++
ebb8f116
GM
2959** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2960has a mask bitmap.
2961
2962- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2963
2964Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2965FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2966or omitted means use the selected frame.
2967
f6499c03 2968+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2969** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2970satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2971
2972+++
2973** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2974optional.
2975
f6499c03
DL
2976+++
2977** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2978below).
04545643
GM
2979
2980\f
a933dad1
DL
2981* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2982
2983Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2984--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2985When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2986so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2987
f6d3257b
GM
2988** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2989to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2990
2991Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2992text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2993is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2994your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2995laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2996just display it black instead.
2997
2998This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2999a line like
3000
3001 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3002
3003in your `.emacs'.
3004
a933dad1
DL
3005** New face implementation.
3006
3007Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3008font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3009
3010+++
3011*** New faces.
3012
3013Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3014
3015 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3016
a933dad1
DL
3017 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3018 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3019
a933dad1 3020 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3021
a933dad1 3022 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3023
a933dad1 3024 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3025
a933dad1 3026 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3027
a933dad1
DL
3028 7. Background color.
3029
3030 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3031
3032 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3033
3034 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3035
3036 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3037
3038 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3039 color.
3040
3041 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3042 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3043
3044Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3045same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3046frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3047faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3048with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3049attributes mentioned above.
3050
3051There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3052definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3053created frames.
79214ddf 3054
a933dad1
DL
3055A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3056have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3057`fully-specified'.
3058
3059+++
3060*** Face merging.
3061
3062The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3063combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3064aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3065properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3066that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3067results in a fully-specified face.
3068
3069+++
3070*** Face realization.
3071
3072After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3073merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3074realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3075available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3076face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3077cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3078
3079Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3080character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3081for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3082charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3083
3084Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3085specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3086being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3087the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3088statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3089
3090In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3091`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30920x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3093the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3094initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3095Emacs.
3096
3097Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3098`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3099registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3100with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3101
a7c13351 3102+++
a933dad1
DL
3103**** Clearing face caches.
3104
3105The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3106on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3107unused fonts.
3108
3109+++
3110*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3111
a933dad1
DL
3112Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3113given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3114for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3115
3116If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3117pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3118family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3119property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3120an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3121
3122Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3123against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3124match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3125
3126Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3127
3128The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3129attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3130face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3131names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3132that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3133width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3134to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3135
52d89894
GM
3136Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3137alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3138doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3139specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3140
3141+++
3142**** Scalable fonts
3143
3144Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3145since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3146servers.
3147
3148To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3149`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3150scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3151Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3152scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3153that list. Example:
3154
3155 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3156
3157allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3158
3159+++
3160*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3161
3162- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3163
3164Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3165is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3166string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3167
3168If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3169the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3170FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3171POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3172SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3173These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3174if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3175REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3176the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3177of the face font sort order.
3178
79214ddf 3179- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3180
3181Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3182omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3183(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3184non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3185
3186- Variable: font-list-limit
3187
3188Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3189won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3190matching font. The default is currently 100.
3191
3192+++
3193*** Setting face attributes.
3194
3195For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3196with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3197implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3198`face-attribute'.
3199
3200Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3201symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3202
3203The following attributes are recognized:
3204
3205`:family'
3206
3207VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3208or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3209and `?' are allowed.
3210
3211`:width'
3212
3213VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3214It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3215`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3216`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3217
3218`:height'
3219
787345ff
MB
3220VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3221in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3222scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3223height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3224
3225`:weight'
3226
3227VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3228symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3229`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3230
3231`:slant'
3232
3233VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3234symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3235`reverse-oblique'.
3236
3237`:foreground', `:background'
3238
3239VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3240
3241`:underline'
3242
3243VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3244VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3245a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3246don't underline.
3247
3248`:overline'
3249
3250VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3251VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3252string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3253overline.
3254
3255`:strike-through'
3256
3257VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3258striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3259face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3260is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3261
3262`:box'
3263
3264VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3265around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3266VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3267of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3268and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3269VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3270:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3271the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3272specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3273defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3274the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3275color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3276should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3277like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3278that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3279the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3280box.
3281
3282`:inverse-video'
3283
3284VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3285inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3286
3287`:stipple'
3288
3289If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3290The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3291searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3292HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3293is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3294explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3295
3296For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3297and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3298
3299`:font'
3300
3301Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3302XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3303is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3304versions of Emacs.
3305
3306For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3307be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3308must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3309
3310Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3311`defface'.
3312
787345ff
MB
3313`:inherit'
3314
3315VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3316of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3317like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3318
a933dad1
DL
3319*** Face attributes and X resources
3320
3321The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3322from X resources:
3323
3324 Face attribute X resource class
3325-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3326 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3327 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3328 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3329 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3330 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3331 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3332 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3333 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3334 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3335 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3336 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3337 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3338 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3339 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3340 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3341 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3342 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3343 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3344 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3345
3346+++
3347*** Text property `face'.
3348
3349The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3350specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3351specification can be
3352
33531. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3354
33552. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3356 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3357 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3358 for face attribute names.
3359
33603. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3361 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3362 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3363
3364+++
3365** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3366
acf3ecb7
EZ
3367The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3368on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3369the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3370default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3371`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3372used to clear the mapping table.
3373
acf3ecb7
EZ
3374** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3375
3376The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3377and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3378type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3379color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3380display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3381old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3382`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3383compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3384should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3385modify their color-related behavior.
3386
3387The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3388any frame type.
3389
8a5719f0
EZ
3390** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3391
3392The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3393`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3394`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3395`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3396`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3397`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3398display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3399the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3400platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3401
a933dad1
DL
3402+++
3403** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3404
463cac2d 3405This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3406To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3407the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3408`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3409
3410The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3411end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3412Otherwise, it returns zero.
3413
463cac2d
GM
3414** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3415
3416There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3417buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3418property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3419
9a9dfda8 3420Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3421forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3422to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3423not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3424commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3425boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3426`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3427functions.
463cac2d
GM
3428
3429Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3430a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3431editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3432
9a9dfda8
GM
3433The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3434
59927f88 3435- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3436
3437Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3438
9a9dfda8
GM
3439A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3440If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3441constrained position if that is is different.
3442
3443If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3444positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3445ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3446constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3447as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3448is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3449fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3450the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3451also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3452
3453If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3454NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3455unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3456C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3457only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3458
59927f88
MB
3459If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3460a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3461
3462Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3463
3464- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3465
59927f88 3466Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3467A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3468If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3469
3470- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3471
3472Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3473A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3474If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3475If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3476field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3477
3478- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3479
3480Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3481A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3482If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3483If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3484then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3485
3486- Function: field-string &optional POS
3487
3488Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3489A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3490If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3491
3492- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3493
3494Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3495A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3496If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3497
a933dad1
DL
3498+++
3499** Image support.
3500
3501Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3502strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3503(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3504replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3505
3506If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3507`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3508AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3509window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3510area.
3511
3512IMAGE is an image specification.
3513
3514*** Image specifications
3515
3516Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3517is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3518specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3519symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3520described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3521
3522The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3523
3524`:ascent ASCENT'
3525
576da55d
GM
3526ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3527If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3528to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3529
3530If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3531image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3532
5d94f558 3533If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3534centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3535of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3536overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3537
3538`:margin MARGIN'
3539
79214ddf 3540MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3541margin around the image. Default is 0.
3542
3543`:relief RELIEF'
3544
3545RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3546around an image.
3547
3548`:algorithm ALGO'
3549
47e351a3
GM
3550Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3551
3552ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3553edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3554
3555ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3556apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3557nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3558position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3559around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3560neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3561transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3562x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3563below.
3564
3565 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3566 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3567 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3568
3569The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3570resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3571multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3572of the factors' absolute values.
3573
327652be 3574Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3575
47e351a3
GM
3576 (1 0 0
3577 0 0 0
3578 9 9 -1)
3579
3580Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3581
3582 ( 2 -1 0
3583 -1 0 1
3584 0 1 -2)
3585
ba9eeda1
GM
3586ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3587``disabled''.
3588
47e351a3
GM
3589`:mask MASK'
3590
3591If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3592the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3593image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3594background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3595image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3596the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3597GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3598image.
a933dad1 3599
47e351a3
GM
3600If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3601in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3602`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3603
3604`:file FILE'
3605
3606Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3607search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3608building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3609may be present in the image specification.
3610
518df5c4
GM
3611`:data DATA'
3612
3613Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3614supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3615present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3616support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3617
a933dad1
DL
3618*** Supported image types
3619
b246b1f6 3620**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3621
3622XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3623properties supported are
3624
3625`:foreground FG'
3626
3627FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3628is the frame's foreground.
3629
46c5af7f 3630`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3631
3632BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3633the frame's background color.
3634
3635XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3636case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3637instead of a `:file' property.
3638
3639`:width WIDTH'
3640
3641WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3642
3643`:height HEIGHT'
3644
3645HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3646
3647`:data DATA'
3648
3649DATA must be either
3650
3651 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3652 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3653
3654 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3655
3656 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3657 bitmap.
3658
c76e04a8
GM
3659 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3660 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3661 in the file.
3662
a933dad1
DL
3663**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3664
3665XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3666`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3667found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3668`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3669
3670Additional image properties supported are:
3671
3672`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3673
3674SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3675name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3676name.
3677
3678XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3679add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3680
a933dad1
DL
3681The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3682to display compressed images.
3683
3684**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3685
3686PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3687mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3688mono images are
3689
3690`:foreground FG'
3691
3692FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3693is the frame's foreground.
3694
3695`:background FG'
3696
3697BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3698the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3699
3700**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3701
3702Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3703package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3704are:
3705
a933dad1
DL
3706**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3707
3708Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3709package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3710properties defined.
3711
3712**** GIF, image type `gif'
3713
3714Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3715`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3716
3717Additional image properties supported are:
3718
3719`:index INDEX'
3720
3721INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3722multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3723
3724This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3725For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3726at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3727every 0.1 seconds.
3728
3729(defun show-anim (file max)
3730 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3731 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3732
3733(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3734 (when (= idx max)
3735 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3736 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3737 (save-excursion
3738 (set-buffer buffer)
3739 (goto-char (point-min))
3740 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3741 (insert-image img "x"))
3742 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3743
3744**** PNG, image type `png'
3745
3746Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3747package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3748properties defined.
3749
3750**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3751
3752Additional image properties supported are:
3753
3754`:pt-width WIDTH'
3755
3756WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3757integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3758
3759`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3760
3761HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3762must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3763
3764`:bounding-box BOX'
3765
3766BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3767the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3768files. This is an required property.
3769
3770Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3771lisp/gs.el.
3772
3773*** Lisp interface.
3774
79214ddf
FP
3775The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3776which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3777
3778Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3779they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3780The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3781manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3782images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3783
3784*** Simplified image API, image.el
3785
3786The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3787creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3788can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3789define an image based on available image types. The functions
3790`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3791buffer.
3792
3793+++
3794** Display margins.
3795
3796Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3797and images.
3798
3799To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3800`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3801`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3802obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3803`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3804the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3805of the display margins.
3806
3807You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3808containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3809one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3810string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3811in this file).
3812
3813+++
3814** Help display
3815
3816Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3817moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3818`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3819that have a `help-echo' property.
3820
9662da0b 3821If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3822is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3823the window in which the help was found.
3824
3825If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3826`help-echo' text property was found.
3827
3828If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3829POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3830
3831If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3832the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3833mouse.
d5aa31d8 3834
9662da0b
GM
3835If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3836string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3837
3838For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3839determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3840property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3841For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3842used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3843
3844The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3845the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3846causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3847
3848+++
3849** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3850
3851The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3852This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3853
3854The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3855scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3856The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3857scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3858used.
3859
79214ddf
FP
3860 (global-set-key [A-down]
3861 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3862 (interactive)
79214ddf 3863 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3864 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3865 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3866 #'(lambda ()
3867 (interactive)
79214ddf 3868 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3869 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3870
3871+++
3872** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3873
3874Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3875when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3876variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3877is called with one argument, POS.
3878
3879At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3880characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3881as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3882property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3883`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3884
3885+++
3886** Tool bar support.
3887
3888Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3889parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3890controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3891suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3892`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3893automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3894
3895*** Tool bar item definitions
3896
3897Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3898`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3899where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3900
a933dad1
DL
3901CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3902evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3903the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3904property (see below).
79214ddf 3905
a933dad1
DL
3906BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3907binding are currently ignored.
3908
3909The following properties are recognized:
3910
3911`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3912
a933dad1
DL
3913FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3914or disabled.
79214ddf 3915
a933dad1 3916`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3917
a933dad1 3918FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3919
a933dad1
DL
3920`:filter FUNCTION'
3921
3922FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3923FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3924used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3925
a933dad1
DL
3926`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3927
3928TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3929and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3930
a933dad1
DL
3931`:image IMAGES'
3932
3933IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3934image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3935meaning of each of the four elements:
3936
3937 Index Use when item is
3938 ----------------------------------------
3939 0 enabled and selected
3940 1 enabled and deselected
3941 2 disabled and selected
3942 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3943
4ba7246d
GM
3944If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3945algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3946
a933dad1 3947`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3948
a933dad1
DL
3949Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3950is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3951
dab96841 3952The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3953toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3954to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3955menu bar.
dab96841 3956
8628686a
DL
3957The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3958dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3959buffer-locally to override the global map.
3960
a933dad1
DL
3961*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3962
3963If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3964resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3965than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3966
79214ddf 3967If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3968raised when the mouse moves over them.
3969
3970You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3971`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3972pixels. Default is 1.
3973
3974You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3975`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3976
3977*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3978
3979You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3980a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3981
3982 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3983 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3984 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3985
3986is the original tool bar item definition, then
3987
3988 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3989
3990makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3991item.
3992
3993** Mode line changes.
3994
3995+++
3996*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3997
3998The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3999that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4000a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4001
40021. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4003a `local-map' text property.
4004
40052. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4006that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4007
40083. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4009is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4010`local-map' property.
4011
4012The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4013properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4014example.
4015
54522c9f
GM
4016*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4017evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4018
a933dad1
DL
4019+++
4020*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4021variable mode-line-format to nil.
4022
4023+++
4024*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4025
4026This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4027`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4028completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4029`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4030line.
4031
4032The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4033`header-line'.
4034
4035The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4036position in the header-line.
4037
4038+++
4039** Text property `display'
4040
623a0aae
GM
4041The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4042replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4043also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4044the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4045below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4046
623a0aae
GM
4047*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4048
4049To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4050text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4051
4052If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4053marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4054the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4055is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4056simpler form STRING as property value.
4057
a933dad1
DL
4058*** Variable width and height spaces
4059
4060To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4061specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4062`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4063area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4064marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4065displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4066simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4067
4068The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4069PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4070properties described below.
4071
4072The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4073characters having the `display' property.
4074
4075- :width WIDTH
4076
4077Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4078character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4079
4080- :relative-width FACTOR
4081
4082Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4083first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4084same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4085width of that character by FACTOR.
4086
4087- :align-to HPOS
4088
4089Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4090value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4091
4092Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4093
4094- :height HEIGHT
4095
4096Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4097normal line height.
4098
4099- :relative-height FACTOR
4100
4101The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4102of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4103
4104- :ascent ASCENT
4105
4106Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4107used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4108baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4109equal to 100.
4110
4111You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4112
4113*** Images
4114
4115A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4116. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4117in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4118their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4119the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4120`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4121area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4122the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4123as display specification.
4124
4125*** Other display properties
4126
c9e73000 4127- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4128
4129Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4130should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4131integer or float.
4132
c9e73000 4133- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4134
4135Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4136
4137If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4138means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4139the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4140``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4141a font is available counts as a step.
4142
4143If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4144as tall as the frame's default font.
4145
4146If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4147height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4148
4149Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4150`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4151
c9e73000 4152- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4153
4154FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4155font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4156raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4157amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4158`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4159
4160*** Conditional display properties
4161
4162All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4163has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4164applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4165During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4166the text having the `display' property.
4167
4168The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4169`(:when t SPEC)'.
4170
4171+++
4172** New menu separator types.
4173
4174Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4175item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4176treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4177to specify other menu separator types.
4178
4179- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4180
4181No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4182separator occurs.
4183
4184- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4185
4186A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4187
4188- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4189
4190A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4191
4192- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4193
4194A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4195
4196- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4197
4198A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4199
4200- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4201
4202A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4203displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4204
4205- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4206
4207A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4208
4209- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4210
4211A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4212
4213- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4214
4215A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4216
4217- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4218
4219Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4220
4221- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4222
4223Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4224
4225- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4226
4227Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4228
4229- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4230
4231Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4232
4233Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4234the corresponding single-line separators.
4235
4236+++
4237** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4238
4239The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4240`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4241Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4242that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4243default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4244default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4245default foreground is black.
4246
4247The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4248(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4249`ScrollBarBackground').
4250
4251Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4252settings for scroll bar colors.
4253
4254+++
4255** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4256display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4257
4258---
4259** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4260starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4261on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4262line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4263the original window start.
4264
4265---
4266** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4267`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4268now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4269
4270+++
4271** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4272
4273A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4274`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4275windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4276other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4277
4278The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4279fixed-width and fixed-height.
4280
4281 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4282
4283A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4284fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4285window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4286change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4287temporarily to nil, for example
4288
4289 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4290 (enlarge-window 10))
4291
79214ddf 4292Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4293or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4294
4295** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4296terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4297to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4298overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4299horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4300support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4301
3787e12e 4302
79dfd2cd 4303\f
3787e12e
GM
4304* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4305
4306** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4307input.
4308
4309** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4310
4311** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4312
4313** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4314only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4315exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4316(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4317(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4318
4319** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4320been added.
4321
79dfd2cd 4322\f
3787e12e
GM
4323* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4324
4325** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4326
79dfd2cd 4327\f
3787e12e
GM
4328* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4329
4330** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4331M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4332\f
4333* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4334
4335** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4336
4337You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4338Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4339`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4340
4341If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4342is the one that is used.
4343
4344** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4345the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4346Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4347separate from the command's regular output.
4348Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4349says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4350In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4351the buffer name.
4352
4353When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4354output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4355it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4356cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4357
4358** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4359the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4360is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4361created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4362
4363** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4364example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4365match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4366quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4367
4368** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4369now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4370if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4371they never ignore case.
4372
4373** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4374under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4375applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4376of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4377just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4378convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4379part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4380
4381If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4382the same format that was used in the file before.
4383
4384You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4385`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4386
4387** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4388renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4389This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4390
4391** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4392The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4393buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4394your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4395is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4396end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4397Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4398
4399The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4400eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4401control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4402format. You can now customize these variables.
4403
4404** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4405filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4406filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4407enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4408
4409** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4410in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4411windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4412
4413** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4414dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4415doesn't have any effect.
4416
4417** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4418not one per buffer.
4419
4420** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4421use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4422 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4423
4424** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4425To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4426`auto-show-mode' command.
4427
4428** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4429avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4430versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4431choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4432occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4433
4434** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4435cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4436
4437** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4438character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4439feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4440
4441** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4442the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4443interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4444and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4445
4446** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4447
4448The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4449that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4450one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4451codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4452set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4453
4454Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4455from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4456
4457IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4458equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4459a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4460`?' on other systems.
4461
4462IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4463feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4464Unix.
4465
4466Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4467current codepage when it starts.
4468
4469** Mail changes
4470
4471*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4472`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4473appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4474non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4475MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4476headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4477latin-1:
4478
4479 MIME-version: 1.0
4480 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4481 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4482
4483*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4484default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4485default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4486sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4487buffer-file-coding-system.
4488
4489You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4490sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4491mail.
4492
4493*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4494if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4495Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4496list of possible coding systems.
4497
4498** CC Mode changes
4499
4500*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4501modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4502longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4503docstring for details.
4504
4505*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4506symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4507found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4508prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4509lineup functions use this feature currently.
4510
4511*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4512"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4513
4514*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4515"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4516
4517*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4518from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4519symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4520c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4521anonymous classes.
4522
4523*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4524syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4525
4526*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4527inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4528support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4529function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4530
4531*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4532(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4533brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4534c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4535(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4536
4537*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4538
4539*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4540
4541*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4542for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4543
4544*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4545
4546*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4547associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4548This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4549circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4550class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4551
4552** Gnus changes.
4553
4554*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4555added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4556Gnus manual for the full story.
4557
4558*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4559before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4560group, which is created automatically.
4561
4562*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4563values.
4564
4565*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4566
4567*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4568outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4569
4570*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4571`C-u C-c C-c'.
4572
4573*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4574
4575*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4576re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4577
4578*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4579
4580*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4581Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4582
4583*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4584`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4585
4586*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4587control over simplification.
4588
4589*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4590
4591*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4592limit.
4593
4594*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4595
4596*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4597
4598*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4599If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4600rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4601
4602*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4603`a' forces normal posting method.
4604
4605*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4606-- `W d'.
4607
4608*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4609to a non-nil value.
4610
4611*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4612where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4613
4614*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4615has been added.
4616
4617*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4618
4619*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4620
4621*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4622`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4623
4624*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4625`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4626
4627*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4628
4629*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4630been added.
4631
4632*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4633`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4634
4635*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4636updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4637
4638*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4639
4640*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4641
4642*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4643
4644** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4645
4646*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4647options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4648nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4649
4650*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4651TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4652of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4653TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4654can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4655
4656*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4657All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4658but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4659the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4660
4661*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4662the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4663buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4664mismatch.
4665
4666** Changes to RefTeX mode
4667
4668*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4669file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4670
4671*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4672lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4673characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4674removed from the label.
4675
4676*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4677a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4678
4679*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4680customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4681
4682*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4683`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4684expressions.
4685
4686*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4687
4688** New/deleted modes and packages
4689
4690*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4691SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4692
4693*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4694editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4695SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4696
4697*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4698changes with a special face.
4699
4700*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4701this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4702Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4703\f
4704* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4705
4706** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4707This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4708conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4709and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4710check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4711
4712The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4713Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4714distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4715
4716** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4717MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4718controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4719directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4720Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4721on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4722string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4723program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4724printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4725
4726** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4727output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4728available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4729input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4730temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4731program.
4732
4733An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4734and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4735programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4736automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4737as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4738ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4739
4740** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4741a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4742MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4743was not documented clearly before.
4744
4745** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4746This includes Tetris and Snake.
4747\f
4748* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4749
4750** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4751return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4752They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4753meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4754
4755** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4756WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4757and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4758
4759** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4760
4761*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4762It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4763
4764*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4765the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4766integers.
4767
4768** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4769files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4770arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4771file names and attributes are returned.
4772
4773** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4774sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4775accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4776It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4777returns the result.
4778
4779** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4780to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4781
4782** New functions for base64 conversion:
4783
4784The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4785into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4786performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4787optionally.
4788
4789Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4790job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4791
4792**
4793The new function process-running-child-p
4794will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4795terminal to its own child process.
4796
4797** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4798when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4799to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4800itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4801
4802** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4803be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4804
4805** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4806:included is an alias for :visible.
4807
4808easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4809easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4810to move or copy menu entries.
4811
4812** Multibyte editing changes
4813
4814*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4815an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4816make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4817work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4818char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4819 (setq char (sref str idx)
4820 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4821The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4822
4823If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4824(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4825 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4826
4827*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4828region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4829deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4830
4831 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4832
4833This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4834across the boundary.
4835
4836*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4837`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4838 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4839 contains 8-bit characters.
4840 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4841 contains invalid characters.
4842
4843*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4844text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4845preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4846text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4847way.
4848
4849*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4850If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4851end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4852prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4853
4854*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4855compose Thai characters in a string.
4856
4857** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4858argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4859for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4860menus should always use the third argument.
4861
4862** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4863read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4864arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4865input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4866
4867** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4868of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4869programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4870inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4871
4872** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4873the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4874returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4875echo area contents.
4876
4877 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4878
4879** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4880NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4881requested feature cannot be loaded.
4882
4883** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4884foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4885means to clear out that attribute.
4886
4887** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4888gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4889
4890** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4891read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4892unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4893end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4894
4895** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4896the gap of the current buffer.
4897
4898** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4899to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4900current buffer.
4901
4902** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4903facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4904These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4905it back in after any modifications have been made.
4906\f
4907* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4908
4909** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4910the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4911/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4912directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4913subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4914
4915Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4916names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4917Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4918which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4919these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4920
4921Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4922starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4923time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4924
4925This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4926Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4927to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4928subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4929`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4930results.
4931
4932** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4933GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4934that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4935fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4936\f
4937* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4938
4939** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4940including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4941it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4942perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4943
4944** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4945specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4946region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4947further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4948command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4949within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4950are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4951region.
4952
4953In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4954selective undo.
4955
4956** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4957unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4958buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4959effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4960Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4961
4962The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4963though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4964-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4965load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4966
4967** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4968no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4969enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4970something that most users not do.
4971
4972** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4973operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4974The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4975applications.
4976
4977C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4978pasting operations.
4979
4980** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4981setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4982like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4983printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4984`ps-printer-name'.
4985
4986** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4987minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4988any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4989except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4990incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4991hits a new word.
4992
4993Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4994Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4995to be confused by TeX commands.
4996
4997You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4998correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4999clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5000of various alternative replacements and actions.
5001
5002Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5003the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5004corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5005alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5006flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5007
5008Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5009flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5010
5011** Changes in input method usage.
5012
5013Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5014the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5015respectively.
5016
5017You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5018
5019If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5020of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5021
5022The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5023that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5024
5025 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5026
5027 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5028
5029 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5030 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5031
5032 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5033 given in the following case:
5034 o When you are using a complex input method.
5035 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5036
5037If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5038input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5039and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5040setting it to t is helpful.
5041
5042The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5043
5044In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5045keys:
5046 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5047 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5048 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5049These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5050environment.
5051
5052** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5053names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5054minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5055get
5056
5057 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5058
5059which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5060
5061Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5062Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5063
5064** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5065at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5066its owner and group.
5067
5068** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5069Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5070
5071** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5072contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5073
5074** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5075which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5076in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5077by the left edge of the rectangle.
5078
5079** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5080increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5081C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5082for writing keyboard macros.
5083
5084** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5085files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5086frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5087the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5088additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5089info.
5090
5091** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5092
5093** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5094query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5095contents only.
5096
5097** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5098confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5099the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5100says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5101
5102** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5103non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5104literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5105
5106** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5107now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5108Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5109inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5110
5111** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5112failure if the command produces no output.
5113
5114** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5115manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5116the mouse.
5117
5118** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5119mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5120function and variable names.
5121
5122** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5123reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5124file-coding-system-alist.
5125
5126** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5127t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5128converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5129the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5130according to the current fontset.
5131
5132** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5133
5134The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5135that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5136nonascii-insert-offset.
5137
5138For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5139enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5140nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5141characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5142
5143** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5144an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5145
5146** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5147letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5148
5149** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5150are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5151command keys.
5152
5153** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5154user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5155
5156Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5157user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5158all variables that have documentation.
5159
5160** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5161shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5162that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5163minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5164it should show; the default is 20.
5165
5166Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5167the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5168of your input.
5169
5170** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5171all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5172recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5173argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5174the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5175Newly added options are included as well.
5176
5177If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5178then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5179for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5180
5181This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5182Customize menu.
5183
5184** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5185the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5186
5187** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5188buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5189invoked.
5190
5191** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5192that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5193The default is 1.
5194
5195** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5196syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5197new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5198(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5199sensibly.
5200
5201** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5202
5203** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5204value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5205two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5206
5207** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5208reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5209for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5210every night.
5211
5212** Desktop changes
5213
5214*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5215the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5216
5217*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5218and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5219
5220** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5221read and post multi-lingual articles.
5222
5223** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5224doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5225be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5226outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5227the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5228made invisible again.
5229
5230** Mail reading and sending changes
5231
5232*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5233the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5234changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5235toggle.
5236
5237*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5238now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5239summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5240the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5241rmail-default-body-file.
5242
5243*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5244longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5245handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5246
5247*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5248it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5249is evaluated to insert the signature.
5250
5251*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5252outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5253handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5254putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5255transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5256especially interested in trying feedmail.
5257
5258feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5259feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5260provided by feedmail are:
5261
5262**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5263stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5264there is also a queue for draft messages
5265
5266**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5267be prompted for confirmation
5268
5269**** does smart filling of address headers
5270
5271**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5272the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5273can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5274
5275**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5276the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5277/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5278function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5279
5280** Dired changes
5281
5282*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5283files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5284
5285*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5286run Dired on the directory name at point.
5287
5288*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5289files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5290for a specified regexp.
5291
5292** VC Changes
5293
5294*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5295conveniently.
5296
5297*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5298faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5299Dired.
5300
5301VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5302directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5303listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5304currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5305
5306You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5307then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5308vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5309control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5310on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5311
5312All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5313is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5314`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5315the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5316`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5317
5318The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5319toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5320VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5321`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5322
5323Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5324ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5325command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5326
5327*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5328file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5329session to resolve them.
5330
5331Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5332resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5333contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5334uses as well).
5335
5336*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5337command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5338you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5339either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5340branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5341If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5342using ediff.
5343
5344** Changes in Font Lock
5345
5346*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5347are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5348use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5349unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5350compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5351
5352** Frame name display changes
5353
5354*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5355frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5356raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5357when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5358
5359*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5360frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5361menu.
5362
5363** Comint (subshell) changes
5364
5365*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5366subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5367with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5368
5369*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5370
5371C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5372that is, the line after the last line you got.
5373You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5374
5375C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5376send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5377the following line.
5378
5379C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5380which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5381previously sent input.
5382
5383C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5384it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5385as the search string.
5386
5387*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5388automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5389
5390** C mode changes
5391
5392*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5393and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5394assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5395definition.
5396
5397*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5398(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5399Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5400style is still the default however.
5401
5402*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5403
5404*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5405are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5406them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5407
5408*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5409and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5410
5411*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5412namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5413
5414*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5415makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5416
5417*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5418c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5419
5420*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5421should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5422package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5423variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5424
5425** Changes to hippie-expand.
5426
5427*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5428non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5429which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5430
5431*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5432non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5433expanding dynamically.
5434
5435*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5436non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5437
5438*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5439non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5440this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5441expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5442
5443*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5444
5445** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5446
5447*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5448bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5449automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5450bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5451against the first word in the title.
5452
5453*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5454capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5455bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5456lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5457lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5458bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5459
5460*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5461generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5462replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5463bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5464
5465** Changes in vcursor.el.
5466
5467*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5468and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5469variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5470entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5471`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5472in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5473
5474*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5475Editing group once the package is loaded.
5476
5477*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5478generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5479vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5480
5481*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5482vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5483
5484** Ispell changes.
5485
5486*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5487buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5488are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5489
5490*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5491A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5492and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5493defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5494include:
5495
5496 o URLs are automatically skipped
5497 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5498
5499*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5500
5501** Changes to RefTeX mode
5502
5503RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5504large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5505re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5506section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5507
5508*** New recursive parser.
5509
5510The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5511entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5512recursive parser scans the individual files.
5513
5514*** Parsing only part of a document.
5515
5516Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5517partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5518the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5519
5520 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5521
5522*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5523
5524This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5525
5526 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5527
5528*** Using multiple selection buffers
5529
5530If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5531for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5532
5533 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5534
5535*** References to external documents.
5536
5537The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5538documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5539documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5540macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5541RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5542the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5543The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5544
5545*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5546
5547The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5548and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5549
5550Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5551the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5552
5553*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5554
5555The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5556buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5557
5558*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5559
5560The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5561contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5562`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5563have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5564enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5565at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5566more.
5567
5568*** Support for the varioref package
5569
5570The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5571
5572*** New hooks
5573
5574Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5575and citations are created. These hooks are
5576`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5577`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5578
5579*** Citations outside LaTeX
5580
5581The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5582a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5583
5584*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5585
5586The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5587fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5588fontified, use
5589
5590 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5591
5592** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5593With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5594the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5595directories that contain the same file name.
5596
5597Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5598Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5599file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5600Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5601have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5602names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5603directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5604directory.
5605
5606** New modes and packages
5607
5608*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5609It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5610it, but some do not.
5611
5612*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5613code.
5614
5615*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5616current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5617around in a buffer.
5618
5619Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5620
5621*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5622uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5623be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5624established system of notation similar to Chess.
5625
5626*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5627documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5628guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5629
5630*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5631available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5632system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5633simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5634functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5635the like.
5636
5637*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5638identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5639
5640*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5641within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5642used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5643the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5644
5645*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5646
5647 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5648 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5649 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5650 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5651 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5652 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5653 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5654 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5655 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5656 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5657 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5658
5659 Platform-specific modes:
5660
5661 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5662 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5663 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5664 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5665 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5666 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5667 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5668 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5669 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5670\f
5671* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5672
5673** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5674use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5675That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5676Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5677
5678Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5679you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5680consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5681
5682** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5683and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5684specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5685searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5686
5687** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5688multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5689character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5690environment.
5691
5692** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5693take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5694string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5695current input method for reading this one event.
5696
5697** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5698now control whether to output certain characters as
5699backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5700non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5701characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5702in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5703\f
5704* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5705
5706** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5707of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5708
5709** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5710in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5711always increases point by 1.
5712
5713The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5714considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5715
5716See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5717
5718** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5719Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5720default value changed. For example,
5721
5722 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5723 :type 'integer
5724 :group 'foo
5725 :version "20.3")
5726
5727 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5728 :version "20.3")
5729
5730If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5731default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5732is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5733`:version' in the top level group.
5734
5735This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5736
5737** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5738starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5739
5740However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5741symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5742support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5743to themselves.
5744
5745If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5746this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5747values whatever.
5748
5749** There is a new debugger command, R.
5750It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5751in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5752
5753** Frame-local variables.
5754
5755You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5756the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5757local bindings for that variable.
5758
5759These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5760frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5761modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5762parameter name.
5763
5764Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5765Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5766active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5767that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5768
5769It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5770clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5771very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5772through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5773
5774** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5775"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5776evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5777makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5778See the documentation in sregex.el.
5779
5780** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5781is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5782parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5783The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5784
5785** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5786If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5787
5788** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5789known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5790define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5791
5792** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5793when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5794it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5795history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5796
5797The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5798return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5799empty input.
5800
5801** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5802for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5803`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5804Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5805`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5806
5807** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5808echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5809a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5810default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5811
5812** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5813specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5814function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5815place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5816non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5817
5818** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5819If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5820up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5821end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5822
5823** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5824which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5825If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5826
5827** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5828holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5829was directed to display this buffer.
5830
5831** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5832with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5833describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5834other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5835set-window-configuration.
5836
5837** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5838window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5839positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5840windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5841
5842** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5843override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5844look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5845
5846If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5847non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5848map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5849
5850minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5851and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5852
5853** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5854except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5855
5856** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5857USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5858floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5859
5860** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5861to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5862in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5863it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5864
5865** Menu changes
5866
5867*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5868keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5869better supported.
5870
5871The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5872a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5873you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5874can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5875then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5876
5877*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5878
5879In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5880 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5881defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5882starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5883
5884The format is:
5885 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5886 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5887where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5888string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5889The supported properties include
5890
5891:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5892 item is enabled.
5893:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5894 item should appear in the menu.
5895:filter FILTER-FN
5896 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5897 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5898 It should return a binding to use instead.
5899:keys DESCRIPTION
5900 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5901 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5902 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5903:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5904 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5905 keyboard binding.
5906:key-sequence nil
5907 This means that the command normally has no
5908 keyboard equivalent.
5909:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5910:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5911 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5912 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5913 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5914
5915Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5916Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5917
5918(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5919
5920** New event types
5921
5922*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5923mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5924corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5925which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5926
5927 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5928
5929where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5930same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5931indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5932negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5933the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5934forward, away from the user.
5935
5936As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5937
5938*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5939files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5940and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5941filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5942loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5943
5944 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5945
5946where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5947same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5948that were dragged and dropped.
5949
5950As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5951
5952** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5953
5954*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5955any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5956to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5957
5958*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5959can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5960that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5961
5962*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5963in Emacs 19 and before.
5964
5965The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5966The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5967
5968*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5969buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5970unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5971representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5972
5973This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5974as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5975viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5976one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5977will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5978
5979This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5980representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5981(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5982consistent with the new representation.
5983
5984*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5985representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5986about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5987however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5988
5989The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5990nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5991using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5992
5993*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5994representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5995representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5996
5997The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5998loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5999is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6000
6001*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6002which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6003
6004*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6005which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6006
6007*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6008portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6009so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6010You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6011
6012*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6013it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6014
6015*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6016convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6017buffer or string being searched.
6018
6019One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6020[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6021searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6022searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6023obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6024you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6025expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6026
6027*** Structure of coding system changed.
6028
6029All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6030by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6031which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6032as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6033vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6034your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6035define-coding-system-alias.
6036
6037The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6038the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6039access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6040pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6041character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6042safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6043'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6044`iso-8859-1'.
6045
6046Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6047The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6048coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6049(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6050
6051Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6052also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6053are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6054the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6055
6056*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6057proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6058This function requires a user interaction.
6059
6060*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6061find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6062select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6063systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6064a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6065select-safe-coding-system.
6066
6067*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6068decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6069last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6070was done.
6071
6072*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6073used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6074coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6075
6076*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6077return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6078characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6079`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6080
6081*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6082coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6083coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6084converted.
6085
6086*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6087coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6088
6089*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6090character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6091character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6092each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6093either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6094range of characters.
6095
6096*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6097Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6098
6099*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6100in the current buffer at position POS.
6101
6102*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6103input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6104function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6105character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6106event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6107binding input-method-function to nil.
6108
6109The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6110method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6111input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6112the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6113not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6114
6115The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6116subsequent events of a key sequence.
6117
6118*** You can customize any language environment by using
6119set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6120
6121The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6122customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6123instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6124environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6125exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6126\f
6127* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6128
6129** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6130options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6131at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6132tree structure.
6133
6134M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6135user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6136
6137With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6138session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6139in your .emacs file.)
6140
6141** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6142You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6143
6144** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6145This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6146
6147** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6148immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6149kills the region.
6150
6151The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6152delete the character before point, as usual.
6153
6154** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6155on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6156by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6157
6158** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6159insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6160the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6161onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6162history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6163past.)
6164
6165** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6166This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6167in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6168TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6169makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6170
6171As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6172and is an alias for it.
6173
6174If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6175use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6176
6177** Scrolling changes
6178
6179*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6180position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6181
6182In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6183on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6184where it started.
6185
6186*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6187move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6188screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6189does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6190
6191*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6192top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6193comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6194recenters the window.
6195
6196** International character set support (MULE)
6197
6198Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6199including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6200Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6201Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6202features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6203MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6204
6205Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6206coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6207character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6208variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6209into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6210
6211Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6212generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6213supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6214language, to make it possible to type them.
6215
6216The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6217character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6218
6219The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6220to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6221
6222You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6223
6224 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6225
6226Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6227characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6228argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6229already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6230characters for their work until they want to change.
6231
6232*** Input methods
6233
6234An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6235specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6236has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6237the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6238support several input methods.
6239
6240The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6241another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6242work.
6243
6244A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6245characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6246composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6247consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6248sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6249letter.
6250
6251The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6252by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6253First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6254marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6255mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6256
6257None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6258they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6259phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6260converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6261
6262Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6263word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6264typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6265the first guess is wrong.
6266
6267*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6268turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6269
6270If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6271byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6272they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6273the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6274
6275However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6276use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6277includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6278translate automatically to and from either one.
6279
6280*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6281
6282Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6283file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6284sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6285what you want.
6286
6287If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6288example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6289system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6290multibyte characters in that buffer.
6291
6292If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6293character conversion as well.
6294
6295*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6296
6297A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6298Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6299requires using many fonts.
6300
6301Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6302collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6303
6304A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6305the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6306have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6307you would use a font.
6308
6309If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6310specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6311display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6312
6313The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6314(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6315characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6316or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6317and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6318
6319*** Defining fontsets.
6320
6321Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6322chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6323with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6324
6325Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6326of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6327`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6328standard fontset are created automatically.
6329
6330If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6331argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6332FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6333with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6334name is `fontset-startup'.
6335
6336Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6337The resource value should have this form:
6338 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6339FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6340 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6341 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6342 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6343The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6344of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6345CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6346FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6347
6348Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6349last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6350You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6351
6352For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6353font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6354following resource,
6355 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6356the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6357 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6358Here is the substitution rule:
6359 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6360 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6361 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6362 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6363 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6364
6365The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6366fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6367that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6368
6369With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6370like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6371name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6372fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6373fontsets.
6374
6375*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6376defaults for a particular choice of language.
6377
6378Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6379method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6380visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6381already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6382language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6383system for new files that you create.
6384
6385It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6386set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6387whole Emacs session.
6388
6389For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6390chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6391with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6392
6393*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6394specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6395specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6396the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6397coding systems that Emacs supports.
6398
6399*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6400lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6401This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6402After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6403is used for *the immediately following command*.
6404
6405So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6406write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6407
6408If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6409then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6410
6411For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6412visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6413
6414*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6415construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6416to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6417specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6418of the file.
6419
6420*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6421the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6422code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6423translated into that character code.
6424
6425This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6426various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6427
6428By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6429
6430*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6431the coding system for keyboard input.
6432
6433Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6434with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6435some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6436
6437By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6438
6439Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6440input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6441translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6442to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6443designed to work with terminals.
6444
6445*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6446specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6447This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6448has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6449translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6450in the corresponding buffer.
6451
6452By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6453
6454*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6455to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6456It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6457
6458*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6459an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6460command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6461want to use.
6462
6463C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6464method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6465
6466*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6467layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6468remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6469which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6470
6471*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6472the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6473related information.
6474
6475*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6476HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6477scripts.
6478
6479*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6480information about the support for a particular language.
6481You specify the language as an argument.
6482
6483*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6484the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6485first dash.
6486
6487A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6488(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6489whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64901 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6491
6492 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6493 B big5 (Chinese)
6494 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6495 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6496 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6497 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6498 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6499 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6500 K euc-korea (Korean)
6501 R koi8 (Russian)
6502 Q tibetan
6503 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6504 T lao
6505 T tis620 (Thai)
6506 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6507 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6508 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6509 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6510 z hz (Chinese)
6511
6512When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6513two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6514coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6515keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6516
6517*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6518conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6519
6520When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6521into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6522rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6523Rmail files themselves.
6524
6525*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6526conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6527
6528Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6529for sending mail:
6530
6531- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6532- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6533- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6534 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6535- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6536
6537*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6538to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6539Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6540translations.
6541
6542** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6543of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6544insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6545without any conversion.
6546
6547** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6548You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6549RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6550any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6551
6552** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6553functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6554
6555Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6556Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6557
6558Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6559mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6560
6561** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6562complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6563in the buffer before point.
6564
6565With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6566symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6567you are using.
6568
6569With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6570just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6571
6572** File locking works with NFS now.
6573
6574The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6575in the same directory as FILENAME.
6576
6577This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6578works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6579can become a bottleneck.
6580
6581The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6582does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6583create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6584file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6585rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6586so useful that the change is worth while.
6587
6588When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6589are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6590collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6591tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6592
6593** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6594it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6595show-paren-mode.
6596
6597** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6598selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6599delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6600
6601** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6602within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6603complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6604
6605** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6606it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6607set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6608
6609** Changes in View mode.
6610
6611*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6612Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6613
6614*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6615view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6616
6617*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6618previous state.
6619
6620*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6621scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6622
6623*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6624non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6625not just the selected window.
6626
6627*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6628read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6629turns View mode on or off.
6630
6631*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6632how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6633delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6634
6635** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6636now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6637
6638** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6639has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6640presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6641which version to compare with.
6642
6643** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6644blocks if a match is inside the block.
6645
6646The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6647is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6648isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6649shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6650
6651By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6652of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6653blocks, all of them or none.
6654
6655** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6656current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6657confirmation first.
6658
6659** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6660now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6661However, the mode will not be changed if
6662(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6663(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6664 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6665(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6666
6667This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6668
6669However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6670these commands do not change the major mode.
6671
6672** M-x occur changes.
6673
6674*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6675it performs a case-sensitive search.
6676
6677*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6678if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6679using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6680
6681** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6682in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6683window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6684that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6685buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6686
6687** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6688after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6689appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6690come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6691
6692** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6693selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6694buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6695
6696** Outline mode changes.
6697
6698*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6699
6700*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6701
6702** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6703you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6704Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6705was already active.
6706
6707The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6708unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6709get confused by it.
6710
6711If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6712set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6713
6714** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6715
6716*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6717conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6718character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6719including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6720
6721The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6722mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6723copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6724
6725*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6726are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6727values.
6728
6729`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6730case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6731`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6732case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6733
6734** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6735certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6736can be. The default value is 30.
6737
6738** Changes in Mail mode.
6739
6740*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6741Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6742composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6743`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6744`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6745behavior.
6746
6747C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6748compose-mail-other-frame.
6749
6750*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6751the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6752replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6753buffer that shows the original message.
6754
6755*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6756with separator lines around the contents.
6757
6758*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6759in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6760definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6761need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6762
6763*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6764
6765**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6766for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6767controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6768Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6769
6770**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6771to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6772/etc/passwd.
6773
6774**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6775to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6776/etc/passwd.
6777
6778** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6779special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6780directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6781reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6782
6783Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6784when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6785be taken to be magic.
6786
6787** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6788files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6789available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6790
6791M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6792(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6793
6794** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6795suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6796
6797In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6798
6799new key dired.el binding old key
6800------- ---------------- -------
6801 * c dired-change-marks c
6802 * m dired-mark m
6803 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6804 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6805 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6806 * u dired-unmark u
6807 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6808 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6809 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6810 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6811 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6812 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6813
6814** Rmail changes.
6815
6816*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6817saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6818chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6819each time you run it.
6820
6821*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6822whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6823
6824*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6825messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6826means to move in the opposite direction.
6827
6828*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6829you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6830
6831*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6832just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6833It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6834can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6835for output.
6836
6837** Gnus changes.
6838
6839*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6840
6841*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6842Gnus.
6843
6844*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6845`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6846
6847*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6848article mode line.
6849
6850*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6851
6852*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6853
6854(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6855
6856*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6857are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6858`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6859
6860*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6861
6862*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6863
6864*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6865See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6866
6867*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6868Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6869used to pick articles.
6870
6871*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6872another have been added.
6873
6874 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6875
6876*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6877generating lines in buffers.
6878
6879*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6880`M-C-_'.
6881
6882*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6883
6884*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6885
6886 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6887
6888*** Scores can be decayed.
6889
6890 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6891
6892*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6893Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6894
6895*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6896the native server.
6897
6898 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6899
6900*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6901(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6902
6903*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6904
6905*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6906even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6907
6908*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6909(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6910
6911 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6912 a group.
6913
6914*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6915sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6916
6917 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6918
6919*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6920
6921 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6922
6923*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6924
6925 Use the `Y c' command.
6926
6927*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6928
6929*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6930
6931 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6932
6933*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6934from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6935
6936 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6937
6938*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6939
6940*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6941the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6942
6943 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6944
6945Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6946and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6947from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6948hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6949this issue.)
6950
6951Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6952automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6953particular news group. This can be done by:
6954
6955 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6956
6957Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6958of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6959"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6960system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6961for reading and posting).
6962
6963CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6964 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6965Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6966newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6967there.
6968
6969Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6970default. Here are some of these default settings:
6971
6972 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6973 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6974 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6975 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6976 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6977
6978When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6979the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6980
6981** CC mode changes.
6982
6983*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6984code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6985values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6986this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6987Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6988loaded.
6989
6990If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6991Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6992style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6993share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6994c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6995must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6996
6997*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6998of the current buffer.
6999
7000*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7001it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7002of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7003
7004*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7005style that the Python developers like.
7006
7007*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7008This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7009just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7010
7011** VC Changes [new]
7012
7013** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7014name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7015directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7016
7017This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7018master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7019developers.
7020
7021You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7022RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7023
7024*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7025other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7026writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7027calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7028
7029*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7030version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7031
7032** Calendar changes.
7033
7034A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7035of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7036for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7037
7038** ps-print changes
7039
7040There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7041
7042*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7043
7044The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7045formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7046`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7047`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7048It defaults to `letter'.
7049If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7050
7051The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7052of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7053non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7054
7055The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7056It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7057It defaults to 1.
7058
7059*** Horizontal layout
7060
7061The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7062`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7063All are measured in points.
7064
7065*** Vertical layout
7066
7067The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7068`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7069All are measured in points.
7070
7071*** Headers
7072
7073If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7074`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7075margin above the text.
7076
7077If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7078framing box is printed around the header.
7079
7080The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7081`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7082
7083The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7084`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7085`ps-header-font-size'.
7086
7087*** Font managing
7088
7089The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7090used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7091`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7092elements to this alist.
7093
7094The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7095for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7096
7097** hideshow changes.
7098
7099*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7100C++, ; for lisp).
7101
7102*** Support for java-mode added.
7103
7104*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7105in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7106
7107*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7108the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7109way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7110
7111*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7112robust and a lot faster.
7113
7114*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7115
7116*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7117to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7118documentation for more details.
7119
7120** Changes in Enriched mode.
7121
7122*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7123filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7124of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7125use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7126the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7127
7128*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7129distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7130as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7131as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7132
7133** Font Lock mode
7134
7135*** Custom support
7136
7137The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7138font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7139faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7140group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7141your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7142consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7143
7144You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7145
7146*** Maximum decoration
7147
7148Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7149default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7150of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7151supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7152to get the old behavior.
7153
7154*** New support
7155
7156Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7157
7158Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7159support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7160
7161*** Configurable support
7162
7163Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7164additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7165c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7166java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7167list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7168of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7169convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7170
7171Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7172way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7173it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7174
7175*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7176
7177You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7178highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7179for any mode.
7180
7181For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7182
7183 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7184
7185in your ~/.emacs.
7186
7187*** New faces
7188
7189Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7190font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7191distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7192to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7193
7194*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7195
7196The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7197cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7198same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7199
7200*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7201
7202The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7203according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7204the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7205non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7206refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7207the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7208Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7209
7210This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7211For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7212this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7213refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7214containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7215the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7216
7217As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7218
7219Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7220Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7221Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7222new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7223
7224If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7225settings.
7226
7227** Ada mode changes.
7228
7229*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7230If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7231procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7232you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7233stubs.
7234
7235*** There are two new commands:
7236 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7237 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7238
7239The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7240`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7241`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7242
7243*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7244is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7245Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7246
7247*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7248formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7249places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7250space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7251
7252** Scheme mode changes.
7253
7254*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7255mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7256for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7257with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7258have any effect.
7259
7260If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7261still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7262scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7263variables as buffer-local variables.
7264
7265*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7266Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7267
7268** Changes to the emacsclient program
7269
7270*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7271USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7272associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7273can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7274
7275*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7276it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7277buffer in Emacs.
7278
7279*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7280use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7281ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7282option takes precedence.
7283
7284** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7285constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7286(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7287
7288** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7289which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7290the current defun.
7291
7292** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7293following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7294
7295** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7296and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7297necessary).
7298
7299** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7300if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7301these register values no longer become completely useless.
7302If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7303asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7304it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7305
7306** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7307example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7308be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7309you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7310
7311You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7312variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7313file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7314revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7315only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7316
7317** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7318since it applies only to the current frame.
7319
7320** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7321file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7322and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7323
7324This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7325multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7326variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7327tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7328instead of just the file you are editing.
7329
7330** RefTeX mode
7331
7332RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7333and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7334different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7335multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7336turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7337
7338C-c ( reftex-label
7339 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7340 knows which kind of label is needed.
7341
7342C-c ) reftex-reference
7343 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7344 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7345
7346C-c [ reftex-citation
7347 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7348 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7349
7350C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7351 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7352
7353C-c = reftex-toc
7354 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7355 can quickly jump to every section.
7356
7357Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7358commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7359Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7360reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7361C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7362
7363** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7364
7365*** Info documentation is now available.
7366
7367*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7368both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7369
7370*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7371bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7372
7373*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7374(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7375
7376*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7377entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7378appropriate functions.
7379
7380*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7381entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7382
7383*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7384been cleaned.
7385
7386*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7387bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7388
7389*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7390shall be delimited.
7391
7392*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7393bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7394bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7395
7396*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7397field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7398prefixed with `ALT'.
7399
7400*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7401bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7402formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7403documentation).
7404
7405*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7406documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7407for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7408
7409*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7410comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7411
7412*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7413alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7414signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7415
7416*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7417
7418*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7419
7420*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7421from alien sources.
7422
7423*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7424to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7425crossref entries.
7426
7427*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7428region.
7429
7430*** Added support for imenu.
7431
7432*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7433of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7434`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7435`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7436
7437*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7438from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7439
7440** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7441
7442** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7443
7444** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7445functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7446Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7447as an argument.
7448
7449When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7450and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7451
7452** browse-url changes
7453
7454*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7455Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7456(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7457non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7458customization variables.
7459
7460*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7461
7462*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7463lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7464(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7465
7466** Changes in Ediff
7467
7468*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7469pops up the Info file for this command.
7470
7471*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7472the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7473merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7474directories).
7475
7476*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7477and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7478files in the same directory.
7479
7480*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7481The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7482related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7483
7484** Changes in Viper
7485
7486*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7487*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7488 instead of vip-.
7489*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7490*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7491Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7492*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7493*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7494*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7495color when Viper is in insert state.
7496*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7497Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7498viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7499
7500** Etags changes.
7501
7502*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7503default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7504Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7505variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7506not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7507
7508*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7509
7510*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7511constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7512
7513*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7514recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7515In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7516
7517*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7518C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7519recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7520methods and protocols.
7521
7522*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7523.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7524column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7525paragraph name.
7526
7527*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7528an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7529at least M times and as many as N times.
7530
7531** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7532in files has changed slightly.
7533
7534With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7535time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7536This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7537with old time-stamp-format values.
7538
7539In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7540(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7541This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7542reasons.
7543
7544In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7545natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7546fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7547(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7548time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7549specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7550
7551Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7552case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7553truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7554
7555The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7556being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7557future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7558recommended now will continue to work then.
7559
7560See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7561details.
7562
7563** There are some additional major modes:
7564
7565dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7566m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7567meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7568
7569** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7570copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7571into Emacs.
7572
7573** New Lisp packages include:
7574
7575*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7576
7577*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7578be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7579
7580*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7581
7582*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7583in shell buffers.
7584
7585*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7586See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7587and `elint-defun'.
7588
7589*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7590meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7591ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7592strings or comments.
7593
7594These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7595abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7596you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7597insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7598at these points.
7599
7600*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7601can visit them by short forms of their names.
7602
7603*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7604Emacs Lisp function at point.
7605
7606*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7607
7608*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7609switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7610
7611*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7612
7613*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7614
7615*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7616
7617*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7618from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7619
7620*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7621You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7622inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7623original place after inserting the copy.
7624
7625*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7626on the buffer.
7627
7628You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7629velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7630(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7631
7632Enable mouse-drag with:
7633 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7634-or-
7635 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7636
7637*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7638mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7639
7640*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7641It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7642
7643*** ogonek
7644
7645The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7646Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7647platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7648TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7649ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7650prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7651instance) and vice versa.
7652
7653To use this package load it using
7654 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7655Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7656 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7657 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7658The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7659ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7660
7661*** Interface to ph.
7662
7663Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7664
7665The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7666services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7667these servers.
7668
7669*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7670
7671*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7672You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7673while the real cursor does not move.
7674
7675*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7676for visiting your favorite web sites.
7677
7678*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7679so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7680
7681** movemail change
7682
7683Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7684mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7685supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7686user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7687
7688This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7689\f
7690* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7691
7692** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7693
7694Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7695end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7696Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7697file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7698file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7699
7700To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7701C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7702coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7703specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7704LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7705save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7706\f
7707* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7708
7709** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7710Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7711vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7712Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7713
7714** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7715to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7716
7717In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7718don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7719"win".
7720
7721** Basic Lisp changes
7722
7723*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7724evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7725
7726*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7727be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7728or by the user.
7729
7730The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7731
7732*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7733
7734(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7735(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7736
7737*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7738usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7739its argument.
7740
7741*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7742
7743*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7744
7745*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7746
7747*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7748error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7749include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7750`format' function.
7751
7752*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7753or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7754whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7755
7756*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7757either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7758adding one of these suffixes.
7759
7760*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7761which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7762If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7763
7764We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7765because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7766
7767*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7768
7769*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7770You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7771
7772*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7773conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7774
7775 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7776
7777BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7778BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7779
7780*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7781choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7782restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7783works using `save-current-buffer'.
7784
7785*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7786write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7787of the last form.
7788
7789*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7790which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7791last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7792as the last form.
7793
7794*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7795characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7796matches.
7797
7798For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7799
7800*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7801with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7802Then it returns that string.
7803
7804For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7805
7806(with-output-to-string
7807 (princ "The buffer is ")
7808 (princ (buffer-name)))
7809
7810returns "The buffer is foo".
7811
7812** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7813is non-nil.
7814
7815These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7816buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7817characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7818
7819*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7820a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7821
7822Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7823character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7824Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7825position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7826characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7827 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7828
7829ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7830Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7831non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7832characters".
7833
7834The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7835through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7836"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7837range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7838leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7839
7840*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7841(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7842multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7843character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7844
7845This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7846always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7847
7848However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7849
7850*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7851because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7852have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7853the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7854guaranteed.
7855
7856*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7857between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7858character).
7859
7860When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7861
7862 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7863 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7864 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7865 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7866 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7867
7868*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7869
7870*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7871`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7872more than the number of characters.
7873
7874You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7875it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7876\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7877is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7878follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7879newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7880
7881*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7882and returns a string containing those characters.
7883
7884*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7885(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7886counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7887character, sref signals an error.
7888
7889*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7890in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7891string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7892
7893*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7894in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7895region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7896
7897*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7898the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7899to a vector of the characters in it.
7900
7901*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7902of a string. You call it as follows:
7903
7904 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7905
7906This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7907STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7908This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7909Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7910it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7911
7912*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7913if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7914
7915*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7916if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7917
7918*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7919to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7920not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7921which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7922
7923(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7924
7925This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7926
7927The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7928If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7929are not included in the resulting value.
7930
7931The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7932at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7933WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7934is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7935
7936If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7937place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7938character extends across that column), then the padding character
7939PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7940string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7941column START-COLUMN.
7942
7943*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7944the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7945necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7946difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7947changed text, before the change.
7948
7949*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7950sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7951one character set for each script, not for each language.
7952
7953**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7954
7955**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7956
7957**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7958set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7959
7960**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7961name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7962which identify the character within that character set.
7963
7964**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7965byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7966opposite of split-char.
7967
7968**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7969of all the characters between BEG and END.
7970
7971**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7972of all the characters in a string.
7973
7974*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7975and specifying coding systems.
7976
7977**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7978system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7979of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7980(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7981and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7982as what to do about code conversion.)
7983
7984**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7985name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7986
7987**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7988for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7989except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7990
7991Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7992which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7993to match against a file name.
7994
7995VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7996a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7997decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7998to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7999systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8000specifies the coding system for encoding.
8001
8002If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8003or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8004
8005**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8006the coding system to use for network sockets.
8007
8008Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8009which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8010either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8011service names.
8012
8013VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8014a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8015decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8016to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8017systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8018specifies the coding system for encoding.
8019
8020If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8021or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8022
8023**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8024for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8025except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8026start the subprocess.
8027
8028**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8029systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8030when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8031(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8032to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8033
8034**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8035coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8036subprocess.
8037
8038It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8039but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8040start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8041connection permanently or until overridden.
8042
8043The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8044file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8045network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8046coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8047It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8048system for one operation at a time.
8049
8050**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8051files, subprocesses or network connections.
8052
8053**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8054coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8055The value is a cons cell,
8056 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8057where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8058the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8059input to the subprocess.
8060
8061**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8062change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8063
8064** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8065customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8066you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8067
8068You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8069variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8070information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8071legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8072customization.
8073
8074Thus, instead of writing
8075
8076 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8077 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8078
8079you would now write this:
8080
8081 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8082 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8083 :type 'boolean
8084 :group foo)
8085
8086The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8087two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8088describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8089for a description of them.
8090
8091The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8092should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8093
8094 (defgroup ispell nil
8095 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8096 :group 'processes)
8097
8098The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8099group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8100but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8101to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8102second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8103
8104Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8105package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8106have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8107package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8108first-level subgroups.
8109
8110** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8111
8112This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8113separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8114
8115** easy-mmode
8116
8117The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8118developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8119only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8120predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8121`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8122`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8123
8124** Text property changes
8125
8126*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8127text property.
8128
8129*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8130previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8131place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8132functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8133starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8134
8135If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8136LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8137of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8138position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8139
8140*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8141value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8142is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8143
8144** Changes in invisibility features
8145
8146*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8147hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8148is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8149should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8150would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8151make the overlay visible.
8152
8153During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8154invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8155needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8156which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8157the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8158t when it should hide it.
8159
8160*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8161
8162Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8163invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8164and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8165Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8166manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8167Here is an example of how to do this:
8168
8169 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8170 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8171 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8172 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8173
8174 ...
8175 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8176
8177 ...
8178 ;; When done with the overlays:
8179 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8180 ;; Or respectively:
8181 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8182
8183** Changes in syntax parsing.
8184
8185*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8186`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8187obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8188`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8189
8190If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8191is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8192used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8193
8194When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8195character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8196
8197 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8198 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8199
8200 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8201 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8202 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8203
8204 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8205 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8206 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8207 determine the syntax type of the character.
8208
8209 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8210 of the current buffer.
8211
8212*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8213value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8214for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8215
8216*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8217and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8218only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8219character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8220another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8221
8222These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8223text property.
8224
8225*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8226arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8227of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8228
8229*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8230(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8231element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8232nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8233string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8234
8235*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8236syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8237`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8238
8239** Changes in face features
8240
8241*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8242if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8243
8244*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8245of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8246
8247*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8248set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8249
8250*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8251set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8252
8253*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8254by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8255and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8256the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8257overlay property).
8258
8259This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8260arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8261
8262** Changes in file-handling functions
8263
8264*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8265directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8266they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8267is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8268
8269This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8270begins with ~.
8271
8272*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8273it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8274
8275*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8276the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8277
8278*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8279as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8280
8281*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8282character code conversion as well as other things.
8283
8284Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8285(formerly it did not).
8286
8287*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8288environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8289
8290*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8291instead of constant strings.
8292
8293*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8294to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8295any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8296
8297substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8298in the same way as before.
8299
8300*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8301The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8302which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8303
8304*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8305error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8306else, and returns nil.
8307
8308*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8309directory cannot be listed.
8310
8311** Changes in minibuffer input
8312
8313*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8314read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8315additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8316argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8317ways:
8318
8319 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8320 It is available through the history command M-n.
8321
8322*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8323read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8324argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8325minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8326enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8327
8328In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8329argument in this way.
8330
8331*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8332from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8333minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8334
8335** Echo area features
8336
8337*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8338echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8339minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8340after the echo area is cleared.
8341
8342*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8343in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8344
8345** Keyboard input features
8346
8347*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8348set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8349
8350*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8351received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8352by keyboard macros.
8353
8354** Frame-related changes
8355
8356*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8357creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8358hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8359
8360*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8361the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8362has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8363
8364*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8365selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8366value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8367in the selected frame.
8368
8369*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8370is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8371which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8372
8373** X Windows features
8374
8375*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8376x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8377x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8378
8379*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8380The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8381
8382*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8383MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8384A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8385
8386If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8387it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8388
8389** Subprocess features
8390
8391*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8392functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8393automatically.
8394
8395*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8396and returns the output from the command as a string.
8397
8398*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8399and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8400
8401** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8402does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8403
8404** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8405at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8406goes after the other menu items.
8407
8408** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8409of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8410around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8411are in use.
8412
8413The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8414series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8415
8416Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8417after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8418form.
8419
8420** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8421is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8422but its hook is still run.
8423
8424** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8425for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8426
8427If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8428regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8429useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8430
8431This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8432are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8433filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8434warned.
8435
8436** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8437way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8438
8439** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8440integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8441functions like display-time.
8442
8443** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8444name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8445
8446** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8447can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8448is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8449
8450** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8451if there is an error in compilation.
8452
8453** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8454switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8455argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8456they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8457
8458** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8459Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8460the *scratch* buffer.
8461
8462** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8463The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8464where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8465e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8466
8467** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8468and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8469It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8470
8471** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8472using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8473variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8474and compose-mail-other-frame.
8475
8476** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8477can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8478full name of the specified user will be returned.
8479
8480** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8481of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8482where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8483in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8484option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8485files at all.
8486
8487** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8488and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8489width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8490the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8491
8492For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8493minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8494with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8495is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8496
8497** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8498
8499** imenu.el changes.
8500
8501You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8502item from menu created by imenu.
8503
8504An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8505#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8506select one of those items.
8507\f
8508* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8509\f
8510* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8511
8512** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8513mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8514
8515** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8516use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8517Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8518\f
8519* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8520
8521** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8522To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8523
8524** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8525conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8526matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8527expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8528word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8529all caps.
8530
8531** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8532at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8533
8534When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8535does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8536as in previous Emacs versions.
8537
8538** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8539non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8540time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8541frames.
8542
8543** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8544if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8545This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8546Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8547accident.
8548
8549** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8550keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8551It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8552line and then executing the macro.
8553
8554This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8555
8556** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8557(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8558characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8559characters.
8560
8561** Font Lock mode
8562
8563*** Font Lock support modes
8564
8565Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8566below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8567hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8568to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8569Font Lock mode is enabled.
8570
8571For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8572
8573 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8574
8575in your ~/.emacs.
8576
8577*** lazy-lock
8578
8579The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8580only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8581becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8582Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8583occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8584buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8585Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8586
8587To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8588
8589 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8590
8591To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8592
8593** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8594
8595*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8596paren and key.
8597
8598*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8599supported.
8600
8601** Gnus changes.
8602
8603Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8604commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8605significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8606previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8607
8608Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8609between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8610
8611*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8612variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8613obsolete.
8614
8615*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8616missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8617
8618 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8619
8620*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8621
8622 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8623
8624*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8625referred.
8626
8627*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8628
8629 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8630
8631*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8632
8633 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8634
8635*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8636buffers.
8637
8638 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8639
8640*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8641
8642 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8643
8644*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8645
8646 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8647
8648*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8649
8650 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8651
8652*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8653is possible.
8654
8655 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8656
8657*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8658groups of groups.
8659
8660*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8661
8662*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8663batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8664
8665*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8666
8667*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8668
8669*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8670
8671 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8672
8673*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8674expiration times.
8675
8676*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8677
8678*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8679process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8680
8681*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8682articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8683bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8684
8685*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8686articles with the `*' command.
8687
8688*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8689
8690*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8691
8692 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8693
8694*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8695
8696*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8697`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8698
8699*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8700buffer.
8701
8702*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8703
8704*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8705
8706*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8707
8708 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8709
8710*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8711
8712 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8713
8714*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8715
8716*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8717
8718*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8719
8720 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8721 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8722
8723*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8724refetching.
8725
8726 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8727
8728*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8729buffer to allow easier treatment.
8730
8731*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8732
8733*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8734
8735 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8736
8737*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8738articles.
8739
8740 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8741
8742*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8743
8744*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8745cited text to hide is now customizable.
8746
8747 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8748
8749*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8750
8751 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8752
8753*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8754
8755*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8756
8757The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8758in greater detail.
8759\f
8760* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8761
8762** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8763second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8764asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8765exists.
8766
8767** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8768as well as lists.
8769
8770** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8771of a given keymap.
8772
8773** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8774given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8775keymap or nil.
8776
8777** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8778an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8779name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8780menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8781equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8782alias.
8783\f
8784* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8785
8786** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8787
8788Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8789This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8790was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8791far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8792pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8793
8794For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8795you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8796`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8797
8798** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8799
8800The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8801do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8802It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8803much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8804chapter of the manual for details.
8805
8806However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8807customization variables take effect.
8808
8809** Marking with the mouse.
8810
8811When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8812highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8813using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8814
8815** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8816
8817*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8818
8819*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8820to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8821
8822*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8823in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8824you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8825application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8826applications, these problems are significant.
8827
8828If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8829likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8830However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8831will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8832other DOS application as a subprocess.
8833
8834Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8835You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8836
8837If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8838subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8839have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8840Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8841separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8842Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8843
8844** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8845
8846This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8847which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8848minibuffer contains.
8849
8850** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8851
8852The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8853It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8854It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8855affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8856
8857The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8858it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8859and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8860when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8861
8862** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8863enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8864
8865** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8866F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8867Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8868
8869If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8870menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8871something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8872the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8873
8874 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8875
8876** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8877to replace the characters it "deletes".
8878
8879** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8880
8881** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8882a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8883select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8884It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8885immediately after the selected one.
8886
8887This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8888made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8889
8890** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8891
8892Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8893directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8894If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8895Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8896recover-session.
8897
8898You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8899auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8900will not work.
8901
8902Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8903normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8904this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8905bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8906now that the bug is fixed.
8907
8908** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8909
8910There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8911when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8912Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8913which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8914
8915If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8916telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8917VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8918the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8919
8920** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8921Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8922is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8923
8924There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8925Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8926enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8927The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8928remain normal.
8929
8930** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8931header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8932
8933Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8934known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8935offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8936Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8937
8938Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8939of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8940a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8941name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8942documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8943`mail-directory-stream'.)
8944
8945** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8946skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8947characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8948with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8949
8950Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8951- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8952wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8953
8954The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8955less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8956headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8957Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8958Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8959fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8960to a limitation in font-lock).
8961
8962External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8963
8964** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8965buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8966buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8967this example:
8968
8969 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8970 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8971
8972** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8973
8974*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8975
8976*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8977
8978*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8979
8980*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8981entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8982will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8983isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8984(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8985The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8986
8987*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8988does the same job.
8989
8990*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8991"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8992
8993*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8994text.
8995
8996** Font Lock mode
8997
8998*** Global Font Lock mode
8999
9000Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9001new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9002font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9003turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9004on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9005
9006For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9007
9008 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9009
9010in your ~/.emacs.
9011
9012*** Local Refontification
9013
9014In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9015However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9016those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9017command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9018
9019In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9020(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9021current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9022above and below point.
9023
9024With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9025
9026** Follow mode
9027
9028Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9029buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9030side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9031they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9032split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9033follow-mode.
9034
9035M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9036
9037To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9038command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9039
9040** hide-show changes.
9041
9042The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9043to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9044normal hooks.
9045
9046** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9047The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9048
9049** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9050recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9051those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9052
9053** MSDOS Changes
9054
9055*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9056Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9057
9058*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9059and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9060
9061*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9062
9063*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9064pressing both mouse buttons.
9065
9066*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9067restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9068are:
9069
9070**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9071now works.
9072
9073**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9074
9075**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9076implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9077
9078**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9079
9080**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9081
9082**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9083
9084**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9085
9086**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9087\f
9088* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9089
9090** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9091tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9092remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9093this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9094behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9095
9096** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9097
9098The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9099not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9100need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9101be different.
9102
9103It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9104than `system-type'.
9105
9106See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9107
9108** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9109now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9110
9111** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9112that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9113
9114** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9115no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9116reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9117
9118The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9119to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9120like this:
9121
9122 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9123
9124SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9125It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9126becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9127
9128REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9129seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9130means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9131
9132*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9133up if too much time passes.
9134
9135 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9136
9137This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9138If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9139of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9140form in BODY.
9141
9142*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9143a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9144call looks like this:
9145
9146 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9147
9148SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9149runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9150timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9151ARGS.
9152
9153Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9154command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9155command.
9156
9157REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9158time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9159does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9160each time Emacs becomes idle.
9161
9162If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9163idle for SECS seconds.
9164
9165*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9166all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9167programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9168instead.
9169
9170*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9171there is no answer within a certain time.
9172
9173 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9174
9175asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9176within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9177Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9178
9179** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9180arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9181meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9182arguments in between are ignored.
9183
9184This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9185the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9186
9187** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9188/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9189/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9190site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9191version.
9192
9193It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9194version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9195for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9196has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9197and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9198problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9199
9200** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9201.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9202systems with limited file name syntax.
9203
9204Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9205convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9206for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9207completions.el:
9208
9209(defvar save-completions-file-name
9210 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9211 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9212
9213This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9214depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9215convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9216Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9217MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9218
9219** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9220rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9221minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9222
9223** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9224marker from its buffer position.
9225
9226** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9227Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9228The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9229
9230** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9231that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9232condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9233of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9234matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9235regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9236
9237This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9238errors that happen often during editing.
9239
9240** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9241into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9242puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9243
9244** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9245now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9246
9247** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9248a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9249name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9250to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9251and not get-buffer-window.
9252
9253** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9254calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9255being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9256
9257If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9258buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9259property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9260non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9261are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9262property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9263over and over for the same text.
9264
9265** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9266
9267*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9268in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9269
9270;; @(#) HEADER: text
9271;; $HEADER: text $
9272
9273in addition to the normal
9274
9275;; HEADER: text
9276
9277*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9278checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9279lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9280
9281
a933dad1 9282\f
3787e12e 9283* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9284
9285----------------------------------------------------------------------
9286Copyright information:
9287
424d8b44 9288Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9289
9290 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9291 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9292 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9293 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9294
9295 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9296 of this document, or of portions of it,
9297 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9298 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9299\f
9300Local variables:
9301mode: outline
9302paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9303end: